Ford - Mustang - Owners Manual - 1995 - 1995

File:01rcpim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:06 1996 [PI00005(M )05/95] thirty-six pica chart: File:01rcpim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:06 1996 *[PI00400( ALL)09/95] thirty-six pica chart: File:01rcpim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:06 1996 *[PI00425( ALL)05/95] Table of Contents Introductory Information ............................... 1 Safety Restraints .............................................. 9 Starting Your Mustang ................................. 49 Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 61 Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 79 Steering Column Controls .......................... 91 Features .......................................................... 103 Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 141 Driving Your Mustang ............................... 177 Roadside Emergencies ................................ 199 Customer Assistance ................................... 215 Reporting Safety Defects........................ 222 Accessories .................................................... 227 Servicing Your Mustang ............................ 235 Quick Index .................................................. 305 Index ............................................................... 317 Gas Station Information ............................ 340 File:02rcinm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996 Introductory Information *[IN00300( ALL)04/95] *[IN00400( ALL)10/95] Ford’s Commitment to You At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuous commitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedication to learning what you want, determination to develop the right concept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, and attention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standard by which others are judged. *[IN00500( ALL)04/95] *[IN00600( ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles *[IN00700( ALL)04/95] ❑ You are the focus of everything we do. Our *[IN00750( ALL)04/95] ❑ Continuous improvement is essential to our *[IN00800( ALL)04/95] ❑ Employee involvement is our way of life. *[IN00900( ALL)04/95] ❑ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We ❑ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of our products and services must be our number one priority. work must be done with you in mind, providing better products and services than our competition. success. We must strive for excellence in everything we do: in our products — in their safety and value — and in our services, our human relations, our competitiveness, and our profitability. We are a team. We must treat one another with trust and respect. must maintain mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our other business associates. 1 File:02rcinm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996 *[IN01000( ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct *[IN01100( ALL)08/95] Things to Know About Using This Guide *[IN01200( ALL)08/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. This guide has information about the equipment and the options for your new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the options available to you. If you do not know which information applies to your vehicle, talk to your dealer. *[IN01300( ALL)08/95] This guide describes equipment and gives specifications for equipment that was in effect when this guide was approved for printing. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications or design without any notice and without incurring obligation. *[IN01400( ALL)07/95] *[IN01420( ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS *[IN01440( ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areas where carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle or personal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people. Please read all WARNINGS carefully. *[IN01460( ALL)05/95] RWARNING worldwide must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and commands respect for its integrity and for its positive contributions to society. NOTES give you additional information about the subject matter you are referencing. 2 File:02rcinm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996 *[IN01500( ALL)08/95] *[IN01600( ALL)04/95] Finding Information in This Guide *[IN01700( ALL)08/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a page number following each item which indicates where detailed information can be found. *[IN01900( ALL)08/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in the alphabetical listing for the word that best describes the information you need. If the word you chose is not listed, think of other related words and look them up. We have designed the Index so that you can find information under a technical term. *[IN02000( ALL)08/95] *[IN02100( ALL)08/95] Canadian Owners — French Version % After you have read this guide once, you will probably return to it when you have a specific question or need additional information. To help you find specific information quickly, you can use the Quick Index or the Index. French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. % Your Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet *[IN02500( ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the services that are most important for keeping your vehicle in good condition. A record log is also provided to help you keep track of all services performed. *[IN02400( ALL)04/95] 3 File:02rcinm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996 % About the Warranties [IN02700( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions Warranties. *[IN02600( ALL)01/95] % Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights and responsibilities. *[IN03250( ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a new one free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first page of this owner guide. *[IN04000( ALL)01/95] *[IN04100( ALL)01/94] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan *[IN04200( ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle. However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealer for more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan. *[IN04250( ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for the details. *[IN03100( ALL)03/95] % If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contract provides service protection for a longer period of time than the basic warranty that comes with your vehicle. 4 File:02rcinm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996 % *[IN06000( ALL)01/95] *[IN06100( ALL)03/95] *[IN06300( ALL)01/95] % Breaking Your Vehicle In Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-in period during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention to how you drive your vehicle. ❑ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brake linings, you should take these steps: *[IN06400( ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when to stop. *[IN06500( ALL)01/95] *[IN06600( ALL)01/95] *[IN06700( ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance. *[IN06800( ALL)01/95] % *[IN07000( ALL)04/95] — Apply the brakes gradually. The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving. ❑ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. See Engine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special “break-in” oils. Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Powertrain Control Module that limits engine and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode to promote durability. % Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle *[IN07130( ALL)07/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean. *[IN07160( ALL)07/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical industrial fallout. *[IN07100( ALL)04/95] 5 File:02rcinm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996 *[IN07190( ALL)07/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in paint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered by warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring their vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative. *[IN07200( ALL)04/95] *[IN07300( ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle *[IN07400( ALL)06/95] *[IN07500( ALL)04/95] *[IN07600( ALL)04/95] DO NOT: *[IN07700( ALL)04/95] *[IN08100( ALL)04/95] ❑ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot % Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with a mild detergent. ❑ Wash your vehicle with hot water ❑ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the finish. 6 File:02rcinm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:22:17 1996 *[IN08200( ALL)04/95] *[IN08300( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts *[IN08400( ALL)04/95] *[IN08500( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts *[IN08600( ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or petroleum-based cleaners. % % *[IN08700( ALL)04/95] % Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel, or strong detergents. Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine cleaning. If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause deterioration. 7 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 Safety Restraints % *[SR00500( ALL)04/95] *[SR00600( ALL)03/95] *[SR00800( ALL)08/95] *[SR00900( ALL)08/95] *[SR01000( ALL)08/95] *[SR01100( ALL)08/95] *[SR01200( ALL)08/95] *[SR01300( ALL)08/95] [SR01310(M )06/93] Important Safety Belt Information The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and your passengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canada the law requires their use. Safety belts provide best restraint when: ❑ the seatback is upright ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched) ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest ❑ the knees are straight forward ❑ seat belt is placed in guide on top of seat *[SR02100( ALL)07/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warning light may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime in the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter. *[SR02500( ALL)07/95] See the following sections in this chapter for directions on how to properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this chapter for special instructions about using safety belts for children. *[SR02600( ALL)05/95] % RWARNING Make sure that you and your passengers wear safety belts. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 9 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR02700( ALL)06/95] RWARNING Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never use a single belt for more than one person or across more than one seating position. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision. *[SR02801( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified technician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. *[SR02901( ALL)08/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, children should always ride with the seatback upright. *[SR03001( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. 10 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR03200( ALL)09/95] RWARNING Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen the risk of the door coming open in a collision. % Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts *[SR03800( ALL)01/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, corner hard or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder belt locks and helps reduce your forward movement. *[SR04100( ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Then adjust the seat to the position that suits you best. [SR04300(M )06/93] Before fastening the front seat belt, make sure the shoulder belt passes through the belt holder on the top of the seatback. [SR04400( ALL)06/93] To fasten the belt, pull the lap/shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. *[SR03700( ALL)05/95] 11 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR04555(M )03/95] one third page art:0011200-B Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt (coupe models) [SR04557(M )03/95] one third page art:0011225-B Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt (convertible models) 12 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR04650(M )03/95] one third page art:0010502-A Fastening the rear seat combination lap and shoulder belt coupe and convertible *[SR04675( ALL)07/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Important Safety Belt Information at the beginning of this chapter. % [SR04678(M )03/95] Safety Belts for Front Passenger (Coupe Only) and Rear (Coupe and Convertible) Outboard Seating Positions [SR04681(M )03/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for front seat passengers (coupe) and rear outboard passenger seats (coupe and convertible). *[SR04682( ALL)08/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in two ways: *[SR04683( ALL)08/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode [SR04684( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt. 13 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR04685( ALL)08/95] *[SR04686( ALL)03/95] Automatic locking mode *[SR04687( ALL)08/95] *[SR04688( ALL)08/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant. ❑ Child seat or infant carrier installation *[SR04689( ALL)09/95] RWARNING % In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will be automatically locked and remain locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides the following: restraint. Never install a rear-facing child seat or infant carrier in the right front passenger seat. *[SR04690( ALL)09/95] This mode must be used when installing a child safety seat on the front passenger seat and rear outboard seats where dual locking retractors are provided. *[SR04691( ALL)08/95] To switch the retractor from the emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode, perform the following steps: *[SR04692( ALL)08/95] *[SR04693( ALL)09/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and, when allowed to retract, a clicking sound is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). *[SR04694( ALL)10/95] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard as the belt is allowed to retract. 14 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR04695( ALL)09/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor will switch back to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seats for Children in this chapter. % [SR04696(M )03/95] Front Passenger Lap Belt Retractor (Convertible Only) [SR04697(M )10/95] Your convertible is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the lap belt part of the lap/shoulder belt for the front seat passenger. [SR04698(M )10/95] Dual locking mode passenger seat lap belt retractors operate in two ways: *[SR04699(M )08/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode [SR04700(M )03/95] In this operating mode, the lap belt retractor will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor cannot be made to lock by pulling on the belt. *[SR04701(M )08/95] *[SR04702(M )06/95] Automatic locking mode *[SR04705(M )08/95] *[SR04710(M )08/95] ❑ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant. ❑ Child safety seat installation. % [SR04715(M )03/95] In this operating mode, the lap belt retractor will remain locked and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides the following: This mode must be used when installing a forward facing child safety seat on the front passenger seat. To switch the retractor from the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode to the automatic locking mode, perform the following steps: 15 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR04720(M )09/95] RWARNING Never install a rear-facing child seat or infant carrier in the right front passenger seat. [SR04725(M )03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt. *[SR04730(M )06/95] 2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt below the child seat label. Pull upward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this time, the lap belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). *[SR04735(M )03/95] 3. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. *[SR04740(M )03/95] 4. Pull down on the belt to remove slack in the belt. *[SR04745(M )08/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor will switch to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seats for Children in this chapter. 16 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR05400( ALL)07/95] RWARNING The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not around the waist. *[SR05600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing it around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. [SR05800( ALL)05/95] To unfasten all the belts: [SR05900(MBC )06/93] 1. Push the release button on the end of the buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch from the buckle. [SR06400(M )12/93] quarter page art:0010559-F Unfastening the front (coupes) and rear outboard lap/shoulder belts 17 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR06500(M )08/93] quarter page art:0010616-B Unfastening the Mustang convertible front outboard lap/shoulder belts *[SR06600( ALL)03/95] 2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its stowed position. If you do not guide the tongue, it may strike you or part of the vehicle. [SR06800(M )05/94] 3. (Coupe only). Place the belt in the belt holder at the top of the seatback. The retracted belt should be stored on this holder when not in use, except when a passenger is entering or leaving the rear seat area of the vehicle. 18 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR06801(M )08/93] half page art:0011198-A Belt holder location — coupe only [SR06805(M )05/94] 4. (Convertible only). Place the shoulder belt in the belt holder at the top of the seatback and place the lap belt in the belt guide at the side of the seat cushion. The retracted belt should be stored on this holder and in the belt guide when not in use, except when a passenger is entering or leaving the rear seat area of the vehicle. 19 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR06806(M )08/93] half page art:0010624-B Belt holder location — convertible only [SR06820(M )08/93] RWARNING The shoulder belt must always be in the belt holder when the belt is in use. *[SR17500( ALL)08/95] *[SR17600( ALL)07/95] % Safety Belt Extension Assembly For some people, the safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length with a safety belt extension assembly (part number 611C22). Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from your dealer. *[SR17700( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Failure to follow these instructions will affect the performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of personal injury. 20 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR17705( ALL)08/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. *[SR17710( ALL)08/95] *[SR17720( ALL)09/95] Safety Belt Maintenance % Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure that they work properly and are not damaged. % All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. *[SR17740( ALL)06/95] *[SR17780( ALL)06/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts *[SR17730( ALL)08/95] % Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that is recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it. 21 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 % Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) *[SR18200( ALL)05/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags are Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), provided at these seating positions in addition to the lap/shoulder belt, and are designed to supplement the protection provided to properly belted occupants in moderate to severe frontal collisions. The supplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to the lower body. *[SR18400( ALL)05/95] *[SR18425( ALL)06/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts *[SR17800( ALL)06/95] % RWARNING Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle occupants to be properly restrained and help reduce the risk of injury in a collision. *[SR18450( ALL)05/95] RWARNING All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always wear their safety belts, even when an air bag Supplemental Restraint System is provided. *[SR18500( ALL)01/95] *[SR18600( ALL)01/95] *[SR18700( ALL)01/95] *[SR18800( ALL)01/95] *[SR18900( ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to use safety belts even with an air bag system. Use your safety belts to: ❑ help keep you in the proper position (away from the air bag) when it inflates ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or rear impact collisions, because an air bag is not designed to inflate in such situations ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions that are not severe enough to activate the supplemental air bag ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle 22 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR19100( ALL)01/95] *[SR19200( ALL)05/95] % *[SR19230( ALL)08/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to help provide additional protection for you. In order to do this, the air bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are not seated in a normal riding position with your back against the seatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and could possibly hurt you as it inflates. RWARNING If a passenger is not properly seated and restrained, an inflating air bag could cause serious injury. *[SR19235( ALL)09/95] RWARNING Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seat. [SR19240( ALL)06/09] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is closer to the air bag. The force of the rapidly inflating air bag could push the top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback, center console (if so equipped), or center armrests (if so equipped). REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE SECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety seats and infant seats should be secured in the rear seat whenever possible. *[SR19260( ALL)07/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag. Air bags deploy with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. Front passengers, especially children and small adults, must never sit on the front edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment of the instrument panel, or lean over near the air bag cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sit with their backs against the seatback, 23 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 move the seat to the most rearward position if possible and use the safety belts. Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should use child or infant seats. *[SR19300( ALL)07/95] % RWARNING When using forward-facing child seats move the passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT. [SR19350(MBC )05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING PASSENGER AIR BAG COULD PUSH THE TOP OF THE REAR-FACING SEAT AGAINST THE VEHICLE SEATBACK OR CENTER CONSOLE/ARMRESTS. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REAR SEAT. *[SR19400( ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the air bag cover on the steering wheel or in front seat areas that may come in contact with a deploying air bag. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision. *[SR19405( ALL)08/95] For additional important safety information on the proper use of seat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the other sections of this chapter of the Owner Guide, especially sections entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats for Children. 24 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR19410( ALL)07/95] For further information about the proper mounting of equipment in the front seat of this vehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitled Some Important Information About Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System which can be obtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Ask for brochure FPS-8602. % How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System Operates [SR19650( ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steering wheel. The right front passenger seat air bag is in the upper right hand section of the instrument panel ledge above the glove compartment. Both air bags are designed to stay out of sight until they are activated. *[SR19500( ALL)01/95] [SR19900(M )03/93] half page art:0010610-D The location of the air bag and warning labels 25 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR20800( ALL)05/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the severity of the impact and activates the air bags if necessary. The air bag system is designed to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions more severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of similar size and weight) head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses the crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag. [SR20930( ALL)06/95] The whole inflation and deflation process takes place in a matter of seconds. *[SR20960( ALL)07/95] RWARNING Air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. *[SR21110( ALL)05/95] half page art:0011063-A Inflated driver side air bag 26 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR21130( ALL)10/94] half page art:0011064-A Inflated right front passenger side air bag *[SR22200( ALL)07/95] RWARNING If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. *[SR22210( ALL)06/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light on the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. When you turn the ignition to the ON position, this light will illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE: Maintenance of the air bag system is not required. 27 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 % A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: [SR22225( ALL)05/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit, *[SR22220( ALL)06/95] or [SR22230( ALL)05/95] ❑ it will not light immediately after the ignition is turned on, or [SR22240( ALL)05/95] ❑ a group of five beeps will be heard. *[SR22250( ALL)08/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bag system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bag Supplemental Restraint System may not function properly in the event of a collision. *[SR22260( ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. % Disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles *[SR22400( ALL)06/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of by qualified personnel. *[SR23500( ALL)05/95] *[SR23600( ALL)02/95] Safety Restraints for Children *[SR22300( ALL)05/95] % In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle — this generally includes children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you must put them in safety seats that are made specially for children. Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for these children. Check your local and state laws for specific requirements. 28 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR23700( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. *[SR23800( ALL)09/95] RWARNING Passengers should not be allowed to ride in the cargo area. Persons not riding in a seat with a fastened seat belt are much more likely to suffer serious injury in a collision. Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from shifting and causing damage to the vehicle or harm to passengers. *[SR23900( ALL)06/95] *[SR24000( ALL)08/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. *[SR24100( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. 29 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR24200( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle. *[SR24250( ALL)07/95] % RWARNING When using forward-facing child seats move the passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as possible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT. *[SR25100( ALL)01/95] *[SR25200( ALL)05/95] Safety Seats for Children % [SR25225( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. *[SR25250( ALL)08/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap belt combination with a sliding tongue, make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. *[SR25275( ALL)06/95] Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) should use child or infant seats. Forward facing child seats must have the passenger seat moved as far back from the instrument panel as possible. % Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when installing and using the safety seat. 30 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR25300( ALL)05/95] % RWARNING REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE USED IN THE FRONT SEAT. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REAR SEAT. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury. *[SR25350( ALL)07/95] *[SR25400( ALL)06/95] All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. RWARNING If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the child occupying the seat may be injured during a collision or sudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injure other passengers. *[SR25500( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. *[SR25520(MBC )07/95] RWARNING Always keep the buckle release button pointing upward and away from the child seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button as shown in the following illustration. 31 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 % [SR30300(M )08/93] Installing Safety Seats in the Front Seat — Convertible [SR30400(M )08/93] Your Mustang Convertible is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on the lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt at the front passenger seat. The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child seat in the front passenger seat. *[SR30500(M )08/93] *[SR30505(M )09/95] RWARNING Never install a rear-facing child seat or infant carrier in the right front passenger seat. [SR30600(M )08/93] If you choose to install a child safety seat in the front seat: [SR30700(M )08/93] 1. Position the child seat in the front passenger seat of the vehicle. [SR30705(M )08/93] 2. Pull up on the lap belt, Figure 1. [SR30710(M )08/93] half page art:0011246-A 32 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR30800(M )08/93] 3. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions, route the lap/shoulder belt through the child seat or infant carrier and insert the belt tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage, Figure 2. [SR31000(M )03/93] half page art:0010626-D Routing the lap/shoulder belt 33 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR31200(M )12/93] 4. Grasp the lap portion of the belt below the child seat label. Pull upward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this time, the lap belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child seat restraint mode), Figure 3. [SR31300(M )06/93] half page art:0010628-D Pull the lap belt out completely to set the automatic locking mode 34 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR31400(M )08/93] 5. Allow the belt to retract. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the retractor is in the automatic locking mode, Figure 4. [SR31405(M )08/93] half page art:0011236-A Allowing belt to retract 35 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR31410(M )08/93] 6. Push down on the child seat while you pull down on the belt to remove any slack in the belt, Figure 5. [SR31450(M )06/93] half page art:0010629-D Removing slack from the belt 36 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR31500(M )12/93] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat or infant carrier, forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and also tug it forward to make sure that the seat is securely held in place, Figure 6. [SR31600(M )08/93] half page art:0010631-C Checking that the seat is secure 37 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 [SR31700(M )08/93] 8. Double check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Try to pull more belt out of the retractor, if you cannot, the belt is in the automatic locking mode, Figure 7. [SR31705(M )08/93] half page art:0011237-A Checking the retractor [SR31800(M )12/93] 9. *[SR31850(M )05/95] NOTE: To remove the retractor from automatic lock mode, allow seat belt to retract fully to its stowed position and the retractor will automatically switch back to the vehicle sensitive locking mode for normal adult usage. 38 Check to make sure that the child seat or infant carrier is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 8. File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 % [SR31855(M )12/93] Installing Safety Seats in the Front Seat (Coupe only) and Rear Seating Positions (Coupe and Convertible) [SR31861( ALL)03/95] For seating positions equipped with a dual locking mode retractor, use the following procedure. *[SR31865( ALL)06/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat or infant carrier in the front seating positions, move vehicle seat as far back as possible. *[SR31870( ALL)06/95] 1. Position the child seat in the center of the passenger seat. *[SR31875( ALL)09/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp shoulder belt and lap belt together. See Figure 1. *[SR31880( ALL)09/95] half page art:0011238-B Pulling out belt webbing 39 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR31885( ALL)08/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be sure that the belt webbing is not twisted. *[SR31890( ALL)06/95] half page art:0011239-B Routing the lap/shoulder belt *[SR31893( ALL)08/95] 4. 40 Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that seating position until you hear and feel the latch engage. See Figure 3. Make sure tongue is latched securely to buckle by pulling on tongue. File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR31895( ALL)06/95] half page art:0011240-B Buckling the belt *[SR31900( ALL)08/95] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard. At this time, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child seat restraint mode). See Figure 4. *[SR31902( ALL)09/95] NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor must be in the automatic locking mode to properly restrain a child. 41 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR31905( ALL)06/95] half page art:0011241-A Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode *[SR31910( ALL)08/95] 6. 42 Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Push down on the child seat while you pull up on the belt to remove any slack in the belt. See Figures 5 and 6. File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR31915( ALL)09/95] half page art:0011242-A Allowing shoulder belt to retract *[SR31920( ALL)09/95] half page art:0011243-A Removing slack from belt 43 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR31925( ALL)08/95] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat, forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that the seat is securely held in place. See Figure 7. *[SR31930( ALL)06/95] half page art:0011244-A Checking that the seat is secure 44 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR31935( ALL)08/95] 8. Double check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. Try to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. See Figure 8. *[SR31940( ALL)06/95] half page art:0011245-B Checking the retractor *[SR31945( ALL)06/95] 9. Check to make sure that the child seat is properly secured prior to each use. If the retractor is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 7. *[SR31950(M )06/95] To remove the retractor from automatic lock mode, allow webbing to retract fully to its stowed position and the retractor will automatically switch back to the vehicle sensitive locking mode for normal adult usage. 45 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 *[SR38300( ALL)07/95] *[SR38400( ALL)07/95] % Safety Belts for Children Children who are too large for child safety seats should always wear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, or contact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of child that will safely fit in the seat.) *[SR38500( ALL)07/95] RWARNING If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted as described, the risk of serious injury to the child in a collision will be much greater. *[SR38600( ALL)07/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and shoulder belts can be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. *[SR38830( ALL)07/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all Federal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit of lap and shoulder belts on the child. A 46 File:03rcsrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:23:48 1996 belt-positioning booster should be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over the edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the specific needs of your child with your pediatrician. *[SR38860( ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not use a belt-positioning booster with a lap-only belt. *[SR38900( ALL)07/95] *[SR39000( ALL)08/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and shoulder belts should always be worn snugly and below the hips, touching the child’s thighs. RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, children should always ride with the seatback upright. 47 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 Starting Your Mustang *[ST03400( ALL)03/95] % [ST03500( ALL)01/95] * Ignition Understanding the Positions of the Ignition [ST03750( ALL)12/94] quarter page art:0010035-B The positions of the key in the ignition % [ST03800(M )03/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s electrical accessories such as the radio and the windshield wipers to operate while the engine is not running. You must push the key release button to turn to the ACCESSORY position if your vehicle has a manual transmission. % [ST04001( ALL)12/94] LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks the automatic transmission gearshift lever. *[ST04101( ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the key. The LOCK feature helps to protect your vehicle from theft. *[ST04200( ALL)03/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all accessories without locking the steering wheel or the automatic transmission gearshift lever. 49 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 *[ST04300( ALL)05/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights (except the brake system warning light) to make sure they work before you start the engine. The key returns to the ON position once the engine is started and remains in this position while the engine runs. *[ST04400( ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine starts so that you do not damage the starter. The key should return to ON when you release it. The START position also allows you to test the brake warning light. % Removing the Key From the Ignition [ST05700(M )03/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). *[ST05800( ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully. [ST06000(M )03/95] 3. Turn the ignition to the OFF (manual transmission) or LOCK (automatic transmission). [ST06100(M )03/95] 4. Push in the key release button until it catches and stays in (manual transmission only). *[ST04900( ALL)02/95] [ST06250(M )03/95] quarter page art:0010619-B Key release button (manual transmission only) [ST06500(M )03/95] 5. Turn the key to LOCK (manual transmission). *[ST06600(M )05/95] 6. Remove the key. 50 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 [ST06650(M )05/95] NOTE: If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the gearshift lever must be in the P (Park) position to remove the key from the ignition. *[ST06675( ALL)05/95] If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, move the steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely. *[ST06700( ALL)05/95] If the driver’s door is open while the key is still in the ignition, a warning chime sounds. % % *[ST06800(M )05/95] RWARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). *[ST06875( ALL)01/93] RWARNING Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe and possibly fatal injuries to people as well as animals. *[ST07000( ALL)10/95] *[ST07100( ALL)10/95] % Fuel-Injected Engines When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most important thing to remember is to avoid pressing down on the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have problems getting your vehicle started. See Starting Your Engine in this chapter for details about when to use the accelerator while you start your vehicle. 51 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 *[ST07300( ALL)03/95] % [ST07400( ALL)05/94] * *[ST07500( ALL)09/95] Starting Your Vehicle Preparing to Start Your Vehicle RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for more than a short period of time with the engine running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for more instructions. *[ST07600( ALL)01/95] *[ST07700( ALL)08/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following: 1. Make sure all occupants in the vehicle buckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraints in the Index for more details. *[ST07800( ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and other accessories are turned off when starting. [ST07900(M )03/95] 3. If you have an automatic transmission, make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park) and the parking brake is set before you turn the key. If you have a manual transmission, make sure that the parking brake is fully set, push the clutch pedal to the floor, and put the gearshift into Neutral before you turn the key. The starter will operate only if the clutch pedal is pushed in all the way. [ST08000(M )03/95] *[ST08400( ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lights on the instrument panel to make sure that they work. Refer to the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter. 52 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 *[ST10300( ALL)02/95] *[ST10325( ALL)06/95] *[ST10350( ALL)05/95] Starting Your Engine 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at the beginning of this section. *[ST10353( ALL)03/95] *[ST10357( ALL)06/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting your engine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle is parked. *[ST10360( ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until the engine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON position after the engine has started. % *[ST10370( ALL)02/95] To start your engine: If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering wheel slightly because it may be binding. *[ST10430( ALL)04/95] *[ST10440( ALL)06/95] For a cold engine: *[ST10450( ALL)04/95] ❑ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the *[ST10460( ALL)05/95] *[ST10470( ALL)04/95] For a warm engine: % % ❑ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine does not start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. engine does not start in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the engine, then try again. ❑ Do not hold the key in the START position for more than five (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start within five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFF position. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then try again. 53 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 *[ST10473( ALL)08/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. *[ST10476( ALL)05/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a few seconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and put the gearshift lever in gear. Release the parking brake. Slowly release the brake pedal and drive away in the normal manner. [ST10478( ALL)12/94] NOTE: Your vehicle has an interlock that prevents you from shifting out of P (Park) unless your foot is on the brake pedal. *[ST10480( ALL)04/95] *[ST10492( ALL)04/95] *[ST10494( ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts: % 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it. *[ST10496( ALL)04/95] *[ST10497( ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position. 4. Release the ignition key when the engine starts. *[ST10498( ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up. Then drive away in the normal manner. *[ST10500( ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been triggered. For directions on how to reset the switch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter. *[ST11100( ALL)07/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs higher than when it’s warmed up. These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle move slightly faster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow down after a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked. 54 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 *[ST11210( ALL)07/95] *[ST11225( ALL)05/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, do not allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Have the vehicle checked. RWARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. *[ST11250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. *[ST11300( ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero temperatures, use an engine block heater (if your vehicle has this option). *[ST11400( ALL)06/95] *[ST11500( ALL)03/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped) *[ST11700( ALL)02/95] To turn the heater on, simply plug it into a grounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends that you use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by a ground fault circuit interrupter. *[ST11800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING % Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heater warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up the engine faster, and allows the heater-defrost system to respond quickly. To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. 55 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 *[ST11900( ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before you start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three hours will not damage the engine, so you can plug it in at night to start your vehicle the following morning. *[ST12000( ALL)12/91] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine block heater before driving your vehicle. *[ST13100( ALL)05/95] *[ST13200( ALL)02/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes % Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. *[ST13300( ALL)09/95] RWARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other enclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for more than a short period of time with the engine running. Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes in this chapter for more instructions. *[ST13400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. *[ST13500( ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked whenever: *[ST13600( ALL)02/95] *[ST13700( ALL)02/95] *[ST13800( ALL)01/95] *[ST13900( ALL)01/95] ❑ your vehicle is raised for service ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes ❑ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris. 56 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 [ST14000( ALL)12/94] If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open area for long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, the heating or air conditioning system should be set to any function except MAX A/C or AUTO. [ST14100(M )12/88] ❑ If you use the heater, set the fan speed on MEDIUM or HIGH with the function control knob at any desired position. [ST14150(M )12/88] ❑ If you use the air conditioner, set the fan speed on MEDIUM or HIGH with the function control knob at any position except OFF and the temperature control lever at mid-position. % If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision [ST17110( ALL)07/95] Fuel System Shut-off Switch [ST17200( ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after a collision, the fuel system shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the fuel system when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. [ST17410(M )12/94] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switch by hand before you can start your vehicle. The switch is on the left side of the trunk near the left tail lamp. *[ST17100( ALL)03/95] 57 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 [ST17500(M )09/93] one third page art:0010012-D The fuel pump shut-off switch *[ST18700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try to start your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of the vehicle and call the local fire department or a towing service. *[ST18800( ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after a collision or substantial jolt: *[ST18900( ALL)04/95] *[ST19000( ALL)03/95] *[ST19100( ALL)03/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel. 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red reset button down. If the button is already set, you may have a different mechanical problem. *[ST19200( ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position for a few seconds, then turn it to the OFF position. 58 File:04rcstm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:28:42 1996 *[ST19300( ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If you do not see or smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle again. *[ST19350( ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving the vehicle. *[ST19400( ALL)01/95] Pushing [ST19500(M )03/95] Vehicles with automatic transmissions cannot be started by pushing. Vehicles with manual transmissions should not be push started due to possible catalytic converter damage. Follow the directions under If Your Vehicle Needs a Jump-Start. 59 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 Warning Lights and Gauges % The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is divided into several different sections. The illustrations on the following pages show the major parts of the instrument panel that are described in this chapter. Some items shown may not be on all vehicles. *[LG00450(M )06/93] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges are grouped together on the instrument panel. We call this grouping a cluster. *[LG00400( ALL)01/95] 61 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 % [LG01900(M )05/95] full page art:0010106-K Mustang GT instrument cluster 62 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 % [LG01950(M )05/95] full page art:0011226-D Mustang instrument cluster 63 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 [LG02710(M )06/93] The Cluster [LG02715(M )06/93] The following warning lights and gauges are on the cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you to possible problems with your vehicle. Some of the lights listed are optional. The following sections detail what each of these indicators means. *[LG02900( ALL)06/95] *[LG03000( ALL)03/95] Brake System Warning Light % The warning light for the brakes can show two things — that the parking brake is not fully released, or that the brake fluid level is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is low, the brake system should be checked by a qualified service technician. [LG03050(M )05/95] one inch art:0011354-A [LG03100( ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake is set, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to START. It normally goes off shortly after the engine starts and you release the parking brake. If the light stays on after you have fully released the parking brake, have the hydraulic brake system serviced. *[LG03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not be working properly. Have the brakes checked immediately. 64 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 % [LG03475( ALL)05/94] Anti-Lock Brake System Light (If equipped) [LG03500( ALL)05/94] This warning light will go on each time you start your vehicle. If it remains on for longer than five seconds, you should shut off your engine and restart. If the anti-lock brake light stays on, this indicates that the anti-lock feature is disabled and should receive immediate attention by a qualified service technician. Normal braking is not affected unless the brake warning light is also lit. [LG03680( ALL)05/95] one inch art:0011194-B *[LG03700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on or comes on while driving, have the braking system checked by a qualified service technician as soon as possible. *[LG03800( ALL)10/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brake warning light is not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled but normal brake function remains operational. % [LG03900(M )05/95] Low Oil Level Light (4.6L engines only) [LG04000(M )06/93] This light indicates that the level of the oil in your engine is low and you have to add more oil. The light may glow for a moment when the engine is started. If the light stays on while the engine is running, check the engine oil. 65 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 [LG04025(M )06/93] 1. Park your car on level ground, and turn off the engine and allow a few minutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan. [LG04075(M )06/93] 2. Use the dipstick to check the oil. If the level is low, add oil, but do not overfill. See Engine Oil Recommendations in the Index. [LG04100(M )12/91] If you are parked on a steep incline, the LOW OIL LEVEL warning may come on when you start your car, even though the oil is at the correct level. [LG04125(M )11/90] NOTE: The LOW OIL LEVEL warning will stay on until you turn the ignition OFF. After your car is on level ground, wait five minutes to allow the oil to drain back before turning the ignition ON again. [LG04200(M )06/93] one inch art:0010115-B *[LG04300( ALL)07/95] *[LG04305( ALL)09/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime *[LG04315(M )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is not buckled when the key *[LG04320(MBC )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is % This warning light and chime remind you to fasten your safety belt. The following conditions will take place: is turned to the ON position, the light comes on for 1 to 2 minutes and the chime sounds for 4 to 8 seconds. on and the chime is sounding, both the light and chime will turn off. 66 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG04325(M )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ON position, the light will come on for 4 to 8 seconds with no chime. [LG04600( ALL)05/92] one inch art:0010118-A % Air Bag Readiness Light [LG04620( ALL)05/94] The air bag system uses a readiness light to indicate the condition of the system. If the system is functioning properly, the light will stay on for 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. [LG04630( ALL)05/94] If there is a problem with the system, two things may happen: the readiness light will either flash or stay lit up, or you will hear a beeping sound. If either of these things happen, have the air bag system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. *[LG04610( ALL)01/95] [LG04640(M GV)05/95] one inch art:0010578-A 67 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 % [LG04650(M )05/95] Low Coolant Warning Light (4.6L Engine Only) [LG04660(M )03/92] This light tells you that the coolant is low inside the coolant recovery bottle and that you should add more coolant. [LG04665(M )03/92] This light comes on for a few seconds when your ignition key is turned to start, but should turn off when the engine starts. If this light stays on, check the level of coolant inside the recovery bottle. See Engine Coolant in the Index. [LG04670(M )05/95] one inch art:0010579-B *[LG04700( ALL)01/95] *[LG04800( ALL)03/95] % Charging System Light This light indicates that your battery is not being charged and that you need to have the electrical system checked. [LG04900( ALL)05/92] one inch art:0010119-A *[LG05100( ALL)07/95] This light comes on every time you turn the ignition to the ON or START position (engine off). The light should go off when the engine starts and the alternator begins to charge. 68 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG05200( ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running, have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. % [LG05206(M )05/95] Overdrive Off Indicator (Automatic Only) [LG05210( ALL)06/93] one inch art:0010730-A [LG05225(M )03/95] This light tells you that the Transmission Control Switch (O/D) to the right of the gearshift lever has been pushed. When the light is on, the transmission will not shift into overdrive. Depressing the button to the right of the shifter will return the vehicle to “overdrive on” mode. The transmission will be in the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected when the vehicle was last shut off. For more information see Driving Your Mustang. *[LG05230( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If the light does not come on when the TCS is depressed or if the light flashes when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the transmission. 69 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG07200( ALL)01/95] *[LG07300( ALL)03/95] % High Beam Light This light comes on when the headlamps are turned to high beam or when you flash the lights. [LG07400( ALL)05/92] one inch art:0010125-A *[LG11005( ALL)03/95] *[LG11015( ALL)05/95] Check Engine Warning Light *[LG11020( ALL)05/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefully installed. Do not install these devices by tapping into or running wires close to powertrain control system wires or components. % The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consists of the hardware and software necessary to monitor the operation of the powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control system during normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, the Check Engine Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on. [LG11045( ALL)09/95] one inch art:0010134-A 70 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG11050( ALL)05/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON, but it should turn off when the engine starts. If the light does not come on when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes on and stays on when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with one of the vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in. *[LG11055( ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine is misfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the engine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towed in. *[LG11060( ALL)05/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you are driving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the condition corrected itself. *[LG11065( ALL)05/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself occurs when an engine running out of fuel begins to misfire. In this case, the Check Engine Warning Light may turn on and will then set a Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel was being consumed. After refueling, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off after the vehicle has completed three consecutive warm up cycles without a misfire condition occurring. A warm up cycle consists of engine start from a cold condition (engine at ambient temperature) and running until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. *[LG11075( ALL)05/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Light will turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is not necessary to have the engine serviced. 71 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG111000(ALL )03/96] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine Warning Light may come on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the Check Engine Warning Light comes on and you suspect that the fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off the engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap, making sure it is properly seated. *[LG11200( ALL)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm up cycles and on the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Light should turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourth engine restart, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician. % Anti-Theft Alarm Light (If equipped) [LG11550(M )12/94] This light is used when you set the anti-theft alarm system. See Anti-Theft System in the Features chapter for more information. *[LG12910( ALL)05/95] *[LG12920( ALL)09/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights *[LG11475(M )04/95] % The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate the direction in which you are going to be turning. [LG12950( ALL)06/93] one inch art:0010525-A 72 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG13000( ALL)01/95] % Fuel Gauge [LG13075(M )05/95] one third page art:0011344-A The fuel gauge [LG13100( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank only when the ignition switch is ON. For proper fuel gauge indication after adding fuel, turn the ignition switch OFF while refueling the vehicle. [LG13150( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion. The most accurate reading is obtained with the vehicle on level ground. *[LG13200( ALL)08/93] With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gauge indicator may drift from the ignition switch ON position. *[LG13400( ALL)01/95] *[LG13550( ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge [LG13600( ALL)03/94] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into the NORMAL band as your engine coolant warms up. Under normal driving conditions, the pointer should stay in the NORMAL band. It is acceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within the NORMAL band under normal driving % This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the gauge indication will not be accurate. 73 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 conditions, and under certain driving conditions such as, heavy stop and go traffic, or driving up hills in hot weather, for the pointer to indicate at the top of the NORMAL band. [LG13650( ALL)06/95] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above the NORMAL band, the engine is overheating and continued operation may cause engine damage. % [LG13725(M )05/95] one third page art:0011143-B The engine coolant temperature gauge *[LG14100( ALL)01/95] *[LG14200( ALL)03/95] *[LG14300( ALL)01/95] *[LG14400( ALL)05/95] If your engine coolant overheats: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible. 2. Turn off the engine. 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE COOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL THE ENGINE IS COOL. *[LG14500( ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the instructions on checking and adding coolant to your engine, see Engine Coolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. *[LG14600( ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the coolant system serviced. 74 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG14800( ALL)01/95] % Speedometer [LG14850(M )05/95] one third page art:0011345-A The speedometer *[LG14900( ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving. *[LG15000( ALL)01/95] *[LG15100( ALL)01/95] Odometer *[LG15200( ALL)11/94] *[LG15300( ALL)03/93] Trip Odometer *[LG15350( ALL)01/95] Since the trip odometer displays distance independent of the odometer it will not always advance to the next mile (kilometer) at the same time as the odometer. % % The odometer tells you the total number of miles (kilometers) your vehicle has been driven. If you want to track your mileage up to 999.9 miles (kilometers), use the trip odometer. Simply set the trip odometer to zero by pressing the reset button firmly when beginning the distance you wish to measure. 75 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG15450(MBC )02/95] % Tachometer [LG15500(M )05/95] one third page art:0011346-A The tachometer *[LG15600(MBC )01/95] The tachometer displays the approximate engine revolutions per minute (rpm), or how fast the engine is running. [LG15700(M )06/93] The white zone shows the highest number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm) at which you should drive your car. Driving with the pointer in the red zone may cause engine damage. % [LG16220( ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (If Equipped) *[LG16225( ALL)05/94] This gauge shows you the battery voltage when the ignition key is in the ON position. *[LG16230( ALL)05/95] If the battery is operating under cold weather conditions, the pointer may indicate in the upper range of the NORMAL band while the battery is charging. If you are running electrical accessories with the engine off or idling at a low speed, or the battery is not fully charged, the pointer may move toward the lower end of the NORMAL band. *[LG16260( ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as it is safely possible. 76 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 [LG16280(M )05/95] one third page art:0010577-C Battery voltage gauge % Engine Oil Pressure Gauge [LG16500( ALL)05/94] This gauge indicates the engine oil pressure, not the oil level. However, if your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oil pressure. With the engine running, the pointer should move into the NORMAL band. If the pointer drops below the NORMAL band while the engine is running, you have lost oil pressure and continued operation will cause severe engine damage. *[LG16300( ALL)05/94] [LG16525(M )09/95] one third page art:0011145-B Engine oil pressure gauge 77 File:05rclgm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:29:39 1996 *[LG16600( ALL)03/95] *[LG16700( ALL)03/95] *[LG16800( ALL)04/95] If you lose engine oil pressure: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible. 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe engine damage could result. *[LG16900( ALL)05/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the instructions on checking and adding engine oil, see the Engine Oil in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others could be injured. To assure an accurate reading, your car should be on level ground. [LG17000( ALL)05/94] 4. If the level is low, add oil as necessary before you start the engine again. Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine if the pointer is below the NORMAL band, regardless of the oil level. Contact your nearest dealer for further service actions. [LG17200( ALL)05/94] For more information about adding oil, see Engine Oil Recommendations in the Index. 78 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 [IP00260(M )05/95] full page art:0010099-K 79 Instrument Panel Controls Mustang instrument panel File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 *[IP00400( ALL)06/95] The main controls for the climate control system, clock, and radio are on the instrument panel. *[IP00500( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the gloss (shine) of the upper part of the instrument panel should be avoided. The dull finish in this area is to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. % *[IP00600( ALL)06/95] The Climate Control Systems [IP00700( ALL)03/91] Your vehicle has one of two different climate control systems. The two systems are: [IP00710(M )06/93] ❑ an optional heating and air conditioning % % system [IP01100(M )03/94] ❑ a standard heating only system *[IP01400( ALL)06/95] If you are not sure which system your vehicle has, see the diagrams on the following pages. % [IP01405(M )08/93] The Optional Heating and Air Conditioning System [IP01410(M )08/93] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrost the windshield, and turn on the air conditioning with the three knobs in the center of the instrument panel: [IP01415(M )08/93] ❑ FAN ❑ TEMP ❑ SELECT [IP01420(M )08/93] [IP01425(M )08/93] 80 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 [IP01430(M )05/95] quarter page art:0010180-H The knobs that control the optional heating and air conditioning system [IP01435(M )08/93] The heating system in the optional heating and air conditioning system operates the same as the heater only system. See The Heater Only System. [IP01440(M )05/95] To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather, turn the SELECT knob to MAX A/C, turn the TEMP knob all the way to the end of the blue range (full left) and turn the FAN knob to HI. MAX A/C uses recirculated air and is the most fuel efficient way to cool your vehicle and can also be used in heavy traffic to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. MAX A/C can also be used in high humidity areas for more efficient operation. [IP01445(M )08/93] If the interior of your vehicle is very warm, drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. This forces most of the hot, stale air out of the vehicle and allows the air conditioning to work faster. % [IP01450(M )05/95] To cool your vehicle using outside air, turn the SELECT knob to NORM A/C, turn the TEMP knob all the way to the end of the blue range (full left) and turn the FAN knob to the desired speed between LO and HI. NORM A/C provides quieter system operation than MAX A/C. 81 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 [IP01455(M )08/93] Under normal conditions, the SELECT knob should be left in any position other than MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the outside air inlet duct. % [IP01500(M )05/92] The Heater Only System [IP01600(M )01/89] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrost the windshield, or use the vents by adjusting the three knobs in the center of the instrument panel: [IP01700(M )08/93] ❑ FAN ❑ TEMP ❑ SELECT [IP01800(M )08/93] [IP01900(M )08/93] [IP02000(M )05/95] quarter page art:0010177-H The knobs that control the standard heating only system [IP02200(M )05/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle, turn the SELECT knob to FLOOR, turn the TEMP knob all the way to the end of the red range (full right) and turn the FAN knob to HI. After the vehicle is warm, the temperature and blower speed can be adjusted to maintain a comfortable temperature. % [IP02600(M )05/95] To defrost the windshield and side windows, turn the SELECT knob to Defrost symbol, turn the TEMP knob to the end of the red range (full right) and turn the FAN knob to HI. 82 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 [IP02700(M )05/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle and defrost the windshield and side windows at the same time, turn the SELECT knob to MIX, turn the TEMP knob into the red range, as required, and turn the FAN knob to the desired speed between LO and HI. % [IP02800(M )05/95] On mild days you may want to ventilate your vehicle with outside air. Turn the SELECT knob to VENT, turn the TEMP knob to the end of the blue range (full left) and turn the FAN knob to the desired speed. Air will be delivered through the instrument panel registers. [IP02900(M )03/94] Under normal conditions, the SELECT knob should be left in any position except OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” through the outside air inlet duct. % Rear Window Defroster (If equipped) *[IP32000( ALL)12/91] The defroster for the rear window clears frost, fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside of the rear window. [IP32200(M )03/94] The button for the rear window defroster is located on the left side of the instrument panel below the headlamp switch. *[IP31700(MBC )06/95] [IP32500(M )08/93] one third page art:0010189-B The button that controls the rear window defroster 83 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 [IP33000( ALL)12/94] Clear away any snow that is on the rear window before using the defroster. With the engine running, push the defrost button. [IP33100( ALL)12/94] After approximately 10 minutes, the defroster will turn off. If the window is still not clear, turn the defroster on again. [IP33200( ALL)12/94] The defroster will turn off when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. *[IP33300( ALL)02/95] The heating elements are bonded to the inside of the rear window. Do not use sharp objects to scrape the inside of the rear window or use abrasive cleaners to clean it. Doing so could damage the heating elements. *[IP34200( ALL)01/95] % [IP34310( ALL)01/95] * *[IP34312( ALL)03/95] *[IP34320( ALL)03/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights % Daytime Running Light System (Canadian vehicles only) The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turns the high beam headlamps on, with a reduced light output, when: *[IP34325( ALL)03/95] ❑ The headlamp system is in the OFF position, *[IP34330( ALL)03/95] *[IP34340( ALL)01/95] ❑ The vehicle is running, and ❑ The vehicle has a fully released parking *[IP34363( ALL)09/95] NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turn on in the flash-to-pass mode during nighttime driving. *[IP34365( ALL)01/95] NOTE: You may notice that the lights flicker when the vehicle is turned on or off. This is a normal condition. and brake. 84 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 *[IP34367( ALL)05/95] RWARNING The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system will not illuminate the tail lamps and parking lamps. Turn on your headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a collision. % Turning On the Exterior Lights [IP34500(M )12/94] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, side markers, and tail lamps, use the control knob that is to the left of the steering wheel. *[IP34370( ALL)01/95] [IP34510(M )08/93] one third page art:0011227-A Headlamp switch location [IP34900(M )05/95] one third page art:0010194-D The knob that controls the headlamps and parking lamps 85 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 [IP35200( ALL)12/91] When you turn on the headlamps, the parking lamps, tail lamps, and side markers automatically turn on. But you can turn on the parking lamps, tail lamps, and side markers without turning on the headlamps. *[IP36100( ALL)01/95] For more information about how the high beams work, refer to the Steering Column Controls chapter. *[IP36200( ALL)08/95] *[IP36300( ALL)08/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps % Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches or crack the lamps. % Fog Lamps (If equipped) [IP42600(M )06/93] The fog lamps switch is located on the console to the left of the parking brake. The fog lamps act as a supplement to the low beam headlamps under limited visibility conditions such as rain, snow, dust or fog and operate only when the low beam headlamps are on. *[IP42400(M )04/95] [IP42750(M )08/93] one third page art:0011228-A Fog lamp switch [IP44200(M )03/95] ❑ To turn the fog lamps on, push the concave side of the rocker switch. An indicator light will glow when the lamps are on. [IP44400(M )03/95] ❑ To turn off, push the raised side of the switch. 86 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 % Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument Panel [IP44900(M )05/95] With the headlamp knob in the parking lamps or headlamps position, you can brighten or dim the lights on the instrument panel. To do this, rotate the headlamp knob clockwise (to dim the lights) or counterclockwise (to brighten the lights). Rotate the knob fully counterclockwise to operate the interior lights. *[IP44500( ALL)01/95] [IP45150(M )03/95] one third page art:0011307-A The knob controls the light on the instrument panel and the interior light 87 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 *[IP46300( ALL)01/95] *[IP46425( ALL)01/95] % Turning on the Map and Reading Lamps Your vehicle has two map lamps for the passenger and the driver. To turn on the map lamps, push the switch next to each lamp. [IP46700(M )08/93] one third page art:0010266-B Map lamp (convertible only) [IP46725(M )08/93] one third page art:0010651-C Front seat map and dome lamps (coupe only) *[IP47010( ALL)01/95] The dual beam map lamps are located on each side of the dome lamp. Each map lamp can be turned on by the switches on the lamp. 88 File:06rcipm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:23 1996 *[IP47270( ALL)04/95] *[IP47290( ALL)04/95] % *[IP47300( ALL)03/95] % Cleaning the Interior Lamps Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic and should be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear water. Clock [IP47455(M )05/95] quarter page art:0011163-B The digital clock [IP47500( ALL)05/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the H button. When the desired hour appears, release the button. [IP47600( ALL)05/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold the M button. When the desired minute appears, release the button. *[IP49400( ALL)04/95] *[IP49500( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens % Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft cloth and a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not use paper towel or any abrasive cleaner to clean the lens as these may cause scratches. 89 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 Steering Column Controls *[SC00200( ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed to give you easy access to the controls while you are driving. *[SC00300( ALL)01/95] *[SC00400( ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever % *[SC00500( ALL)07/94] *[SC00600( ALL)01/95] *[SC00700( ALL)05/95] *[SC00800( ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steering column to: ❑ operate the turn signals ❑ turn the high beams on/off ❑ flash the lamps ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washer on/off [SC01900( ALL)02/95] one third page art:0011292-A The turn signal lever *[SC02100( ALL)01/95] *[SC02201( ALL)03/95] % Turn Signals Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash. 91 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 *[SC02301( ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move the lever back to the center (off) position. *[SC02401( ALL)08/95] For lane changes, move the lever far enough to signal but not to latch. The lever will return to the off position when you release it. *[SC02700( ALL)05/95] *[SC02800( ALL)05/95] High Beams *[SC02900( ALL)05/95] To turn off the high beams, pull the lever toward you until it latches. The high beam indicator light turns off. [SC02955(M )06/93] NOTE: The fog lamps will turn off if you put high beams on while fog lamps are on. *[SC03200( ALL)08/95] *[SC03300( ALL)06/95] Flashing the Lights *[SC03500( ALL)08/95] *[SC03600( ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer % % % To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp control knob to the headlamp ON position and push the turn signal lever away from you until it latches. When the high beams are ON, the high beam indicator light on the instrument panel comes on. To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward you for a moment and then release it. The headlamps will flash whether the headlamp knob is in the on or off position. To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition key must be turned to the ON or ACC position. [SC03750( ALL)01/95] Rotate the end of the lever away from you to activate the wipers. The first seven detents are interval wipe positions, the eighth detent is the LO position and the ninth detent is the HI position. *[SC03800( ALL)01/95] To turn the wipers off, turn the knob toward you to the OFF position. 92 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 *[SC04100( ALL)08/95] *[SC04205( ALL)01/95] % Variable Interval Wipers In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle has wipers that you can set to operate at varying intervals. For example, you can set the interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles or more often in heavier rain. [SC04700( ALL)02/95] one third page art:0011293-A The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever *[SC04900( ALL)03/94] To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at the end of the turn signal lever toward or away from you until the wipers are going at the desired interval. *[SC05300( ALL)08/95] *[SC05401( ALL)01/95] Windshield Washer *[SC05500( ALL)03/95] If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level and fill it if it is low. See the Servicing Your Mustang chapter. If there is enough fluid, consult your nearest Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. To clean the windshield, push in the end of the wiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knob pushed in. After you release the knob, the wipers operate for two to three cycles before turning off (if the wipers were OFF) or returning to HI, LO, or the interval setting selected. 93 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 *[SC05600( ALL)08/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluid container is empty or activate the washers at any time for more than 15 seconds continuously. This could damage the washer pump system. *[SC05700( ALL)08/95] RWARNING In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision. Always warm up the windshield with the defroster before you use the washer fluid. If you cannot see through the windshield clearly, it can increase the risk of being involved in a collision. *[SC05800( ALL)08/95] For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacing your windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index. % Hazard Flasher [SC05820( ALL)05/95] To alert other drivers to hazardous situations, push in the hazard flasher on the top of the steering column. The same switch turns the flashers off. *[SC05830( ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle is running or not. The flashers work for up to two hours when the battery is fully charged and in good condition without draining the battery excessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or if the battery is not fully charged, the battery can be drained. *[SC05810( ALL)03/95] 94 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 [SC05865(M )12/93] one third page art:0011229-A The control switch for the hazard flashers % *[SC05900( ALL)01/95] *[SC06000( ALL)05/95] Horn To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel. [SC06105(M )08/93] half page art:0011165-B The horn on the steering wheel 95 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 % *[SC07300( ALL)05/95] *[SC07400( ALL)06/95] Tilt Steering RWARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. [SC07700(MBC )03/93] half page art:0010088-B The lever to tilt the steering wheel *[SC08000( ALL)09/95] To change the position of the steering wheel, pull the release lever on the column toward you. Tip the steering wheel to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. 96 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 % *[SC08600( ALL)03/91] *[SC08800( ALL)06/95] Speed Control (If equipped) If your vehicle has speed control, you can automatically maintain a constant speed at or above 30 mph (50 km/h). *[SC08900( ALL)06/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or in Canada the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) approved may cause the speed control to malfunction. Therefore, use only properly installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radio transmitting equipment in your vehicle. [SC09000(M )05/95] NOTE: For vehicles equipped with 5-speed manual transmission, it may be preferable to drive in 4 (Fourth) gear in mountainous areas or at high altitude to improve speed control performance. [SC09100(M )12/94] NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at high elevations, or when pulling a trailer, it may be desirable to drive with the transmission in the Overdrive off mode. This can be done by depressing the Transmission Control Switch (O/D) to the right of the transmission gear selection lever. Driving in this mode prevents the transmission from shifting excessively when ascending grades, and helps maintain speed when going down steep hills. *[SC09200( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when using the speed control. This will cause the engine to overspeed. [SC09250( ALL)12/94] When driving uphill, especially with a heavy load, significant speed drops may occur. If the speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h) the automatic speed control will, by design, be suspended. Some vehicles may require 97 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 temporary resumption of manual speed control while ascending steep grades in order to maintain the selected speed. [SC09300(MBC )08/93] half page art:0001014-B The speed control switches on the steering wheel *[SC10100( ALL)08/95] *[SC10300( ALL)08/95] *[SC10400( ALL)08/95] To set the speed control: 1. Press and release the ON switch. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above 30 mph (50 km/h) using the accelerator pedal. *[SC10800( ALL)08/95] 3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately to set your speed. If you keep this switch pressed, your speed will continue to increase. *[SC10900( ALL)08/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set. 98 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 *[SC11000( ALL)08/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle may momentarily slow down or speed up, even though the speed control is on. This is normal. *[SC11030( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your set speed while driving in D (Drive) on a downhill grade, you may want to depress the Transmission Control Switch located on the shift lever to turn off overdrive to reduce vehicle speed. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it goes above your set speed on a downhill grade. [SC11045(M )03/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 5 speed manual transmission, and if your speed increases above your set speed while driving in 5 (Fifth) gear on a downhill grade, you may want to shift to 4 (Fourth) gear to reduce vehicle speed. Depressing the clutch pedal cancels speed control, therefore speed control must be reset by pressing the SET/ACCEL or RESUME buttons. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it goes above your set speed on a downhill grade. *[SC11100( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. 99 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 % Accelerating With the Speed Control Operating *[SC11300( ALL)08/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up momentarily. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the set speed. *[SC11400( ALL)08/95] *[SC11450( ALL)08/95] Resetting the Speed Control *[SC11200( ALL)08/95] % [SC11500( ALL)05/94] To reset the speed control to a lower speed, use one of the following procedures: ❑ COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed. *[SC11550( ALL)08/95] ❑ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle % [SC11600(M GV)05/95] ❑ TAP-DOWN — Press and then quickly attains the desired speed, press the SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately. release the COAST switch. Each time you “tap” the switch, the set speed will decrease by one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause the set speed to decrease in increments of one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if the current set speed is 60 mph (96 km/h) five (5) taps of the COAST switch will decrease the vehicle speed and SET it at 55 mph (88 km/h). *[SC11650( ALL)08/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph (50 km/h) by any of the above methods, then you must manually accelerate to a speed over 30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system. *[SC11700( ALL)08/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed, follow one of these procedures: [SC11750( ALL)05/94] ❑ ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCEL switch. Release the switch when the vehicle has accelerated to the desired speed. 100 File:07rcscm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:30:54 1996 *[SC11800( ALL)08/95] ❑ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the % [SC11850(M GV)05/95] ❑ TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release the vehicle attains the desired speed, press the SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately. SET ACCEL switch. Each time you “tap” the switch, the set speed will increase by one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause the set speed to increase in increments of one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if the current set speed is 55 mph (88 km/h) five (5) taps of the SET ACCEL switch will increase the vehicle speed and SET it at 60 mph (96 km/h). % Resuming a Set Speed [SC12900(M )03/95] If you press the brake or clutch pedal, speed control is suspended. You can return to the set speed you set by pressing the RESUME switch, as long as you did not press the OFF switch. You must be driving at least 30 mph (48 km/h). *[SC13400( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle will gradually return to the previously set speed and then maintain it. *[SC13501( ALL)01/95] *[SC13601( ALL)08/95] *[SC13701( ALL)01/95] To Turn Speed Control Off *[SC12800( ALL)08/95] % Press the OFF switch. Speed control is also turned OFF each time the vehicle ignition is shut off. 101 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 Features *[FV00300( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find out about standard and optional features. *[FV00400( ALL)01/95] % [FV01200(MBC )03/95] * *[FV01300(MBC )01/95] Doors % Anti-theft front door lock knobs Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to prevent unlocking the door by pulling up on the lock knob. To unlock and open the front door from inside the vehicle, pull on the inside door handle. % Power Door Locks (If equipped) [FV01600( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, the controls to lock the doors are on the trim panel of the front door. When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain locked. If the power mechanism fails, the manual door locks will override the power controls. Pulling on a front inside door handle will automatically override and release the front door lock. *[FV01400( ALL)04/95] 103 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV01900(M )10/95] half page art:0010222-C The power locks on the driver’s door % Anti-Theft Alarm System (If equipped) *[FV03220(MBC )05/95] When armed, this system helps protect your vehicle against break-ins or theft. *[FV03210(MBC )09/95] % When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system triggers and will: *[FV03240(MBC )05/95] ❑ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and *[FV03250(MBC )06/95] *[FV03260(MBC )05/95] ❑ honk the horn ❑ disable the starting circuit to prevent the *[FV03230(MBC )05/95] alarm indicator lamp vehicle from being started 104 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 *[FV03270(M )05/95] NOTE: The factory installed Remote Entry System has a PANIC feature that also chirps the vehicle horn and flashes the interior/exterior lamps when the PANIC button on the remote entry transmitter is pushed. The PANIC alarm and the Anti-Theft alarm are two separate features. Both the anti-theft alarm and the PANIC feature can be active at the same time. [FV03280(MBC )05/95] To tell the difference between a PANIC alarm and a triggered Anti-theft alarm: [FV03290(MBC )10/95] ❑ only the Anti-Theft alarm will cause the alarm indicator lamp (located in the instrument cluster) to flash on and off. [FV03301(MBC )05/95] ❑ only the Anti-Theft alarm will disable the start circuit so that the vehicle can not be started. [FV03310(MBC )05/95] ❑ the Anti-Theft alarm will not stop by pushing the PANIC button on the Remote Entry transmitter. *[FV03320(MBC )05/95] For more information on the PANIC alarm, see Remote Entry System in the Index. % Arming the system [FV03340(MBC )05/95] To arm the system, do the following steps in sequence: *[FV03350(MBC )07/95] 1. Remove the key from the ignition. The hood must be closed to arm the system. *[FV03360(MBC )05/95] 2. Open any door. The alarm indicator light will start flashing to remind you to arm the system. [FV03370(MBC )05/95] 3. Lock the doors by using the power door lock switch or by pressing the remote entry transmitter LOCK button. *[FV03330(MBC )05/95] [FV03380(MBC )05/95] The alarm indicator will now glow steadily. 105 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV03390(MBC )05/95] 4. *[FV03400(MBC )06/95] NOTE: Be sure to close all doors completely. If not, the alarm indicator light will remain on. Remember, your anti-theft system is armed only after the alarm indicator light remains on steadily for approximately 30 seconds after the last door is closed, and then goes out. [FV03410(MBC )05/95] You can also arm the anti-theft system by following this sequence: [FV03420(MBC )08/95] 1. Remove key from ignition. *[FV03430(MBC )05/95] 2. Close all of the doors. [FV03440(M )05/94] 3. Press the remote entry transmitter LOCK button. The alarm indicator will come on for 30 seconds to show the alarm is arming and then turn off to show that the alarm has armed. *[FV03450(MBC )05/95] The anti-theft system is designed to work with the factory installed remote entry system. It may not work with other remote entry systems. *[FV03460(MBC )05/95] *[FV03470(MBC )05/95] Disarming an untriggered anti-theft system % [FV03480(MBC )05/95] Close all doors. The alarm indicator light will then remain on steadily for approximately 30 seconds and then go out. When the light goes out, the system is armed. You can disarm the system by: ❑ unlocking a door with the key (turn the key all the way to the end of travel or the system may not disarm. *[FV03490(MBC )05/95] ❑ using the UNLOCK button of the remote [FV03500(MBC )05/95] ❑ if remaining in the vehicle, turn the ignition entry transmitter switch to ON or ACC 106 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 *[FV03510(MBC )05/95] *[FV03520(MBC )05/95] [FV03530(MBC )05/95] Triggering the alarm system The armed system will be triggered if: ❑ any door is opened without disarming the system first (see previous paragraphs) *[FV03540(MBC )10/95] *[FV03543(MBC )09/95] [FV03544(M )10/95] ❑ the trunk lock cylinder is removed NOTE: You can open the trunk with your key without setting off the alarm. ❑ the hood is opened (except on GT/Cobra vehicles) [FV03546(M )10/95] ❑ the ignition key lock cylinder is forcibly removed from the steering column (except on GT/Cobra vehicles where the coded key anti-theft system provides this protection). *[FV03550(MBC )05/95] *[FV03560(MBC )05/95] *[FV03570(MBC )05/95] *[FV03580(MBC )05/95] Disarming a triggered system *[FV03582(MBC )09/95] NOTE: The flashing lights and honking horn will shut off automatically within 2 minutes 45 seconds after the system is triggered. It will trigger again if another intrusion occurs. However, the starter circuit remains disabled until the system is disarmed. % The alarm can be disarmed by: ❑ unlocking a front door with the key ❑ using the UNLOCK button of the remote entry transmitter 107 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV03583(M )05/95] Coded Key Anti-Theft System (If equipped) [FV03584(M )10/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the coded key anti-theft system, you can only use an electronically coded key to start the vehicle. During each vehicle start sequence, the coded key is read by the anti-theft system. If the key’s ID code matches that in the anti-theft system, the vehicle is enabled to start. If the key’s ID code does not match the anti-theft system, or if no coded key is detected, then the vehicle is not able to start. Your vehicle was equipped with two electronically coded keys. The coded ignition key is larger than normal due to the electronics located in the head of the key. Additional spare keys, maximum of 14, can be purchased either through your dealership or selected retailers. Be sure to purchase only coded keys with a Ford or Mercury logo on it to ensure proper functionality. If both supplied keys are lost or stolen, the vehicle must be brought to the dealership for re-initialization. (All keys must be brought to the dealer, if any.) [FV03585(M )05/95] quarter page art:0011372-A 108 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV03586(M )05/95] Theft Indicator *[FV03587(M )10/95] The indicator provides system proveout and operating status. The system activates the indicator when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position. This indicator helps to determine possible fault conditions and/or normal operating proveout. The system will illuminate the indicator for two (2) seconds then go out to acknowledge normal operating conditions. If the indicator does not illuminate at key ON or flashes, have the system serviced. *[FV03588(M )10/95] *[FV03589(M )10/95] Spare Key Programming Procedure *[FV03590(M )10/95] ❑ Using a coded key that you can start your *[FV03591(M )10/95] ❑ Within 15 seconds, insert a new key into the *[FV03592(M )10/95] If the key has been coded, the theft indicator will illuminate for two seconds. The key can then be used to start the vehicle. *[FV03593(M )10/95] Repeat until all chosen keys have been coded (max=16). *[FV03594(M )10/95] If the key coding failed, the theft indicator will flash and the vehicle cannot be started. One of 3 causes are possible: *[FV03595(M )10/95] ❑ The new key was not inserted within 15 *[FV03596(M )10/95] ❑ All 16 key codes have been stored or ❑ The key does not have an electronic code [FV03597(M )05/95] Two electronically coded keys were supplied with your vehicle, use one of these with the procedure below: engine with, turn the ignition from the ON to the OFF position. ignition and turn it to ON or START. The vehicle does not have to be started. seconds or 109 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % Remote Entry System (If equipped) *[FV08036( ALL)03/94] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you can lock and unlock the vehicle doors and open the trunk without using a key. The remote also has a personal alarm feature. The buttons for the system are located on the hand held transmitter(s) that came with your vehicle. *[FV08040( ALL)06/95] The system will work with up to four transmitters. Your vehicle came with two transmitters. Additional transmitters can be ordered from your dealer. *[FV08045(MBC )02/95] The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the OFF position. *[FV08030( ALL)05/95] [FV08050(MBC )02/95] one third page art:0001000-A Remote entry transmitter *[FV08055( ALL)02/95] *[FV08060( ALL)02/95] Unlocking the doors and opening the trunk *[FV08065( ALL)02/95] To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCK button a second time within five seconds of unlocking the driver’s door. *[FV08070(MBC )02/95] To open the trunk, press the TRUNK button. % To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button. 110 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 *[FV08080( ALL)02/95] *[FV08085( ALL)02/95] *[FV08090(MBC )01/95] Locking the doors *[FV08114( ALL)02/95] *[FV08120( ALL)02/95] Activating the remote personal alarm [FV08125( ALL)05/94] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK, TRUNK or PANIC buttons, the illuminated entry system turns on the interior lights for 25 seconds. You can turn these lights off with the LOCK button or by turning the ignition to the RUN position. The interior lights will not turn off if you have turned them on manually or if a door is open. % To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button. If you would like a signal that the doors are being locked, press the LOCK button again within five seconds. The doors will lock again, the horn will beep and the low beam headlamps and tail lamps will flash. If you wish to activate the remote personal alarm, press the PANIC button. This will honk the horn and flash the low beam headlamps and tail lamps for approximately two minutes and forty-five seconds. You can turn it OFF by pressing the PANIC button again or by turning the ignition key to the RUN position. % Arming and disarming the alarm system [FV08300(M )05/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional factory installed anti-theft system, the remote entry system will automatically arm it when the doors are locked with the remote entry LOCK button. The remote entry UNLOCK button will disarm or reset a triggered anti-theft alarm. *[FV08400(M )05/95] The remote entry system is designed to work with the factory installed anti-theft system. It may not work with other anti-theft systems. *[FV08200(M )05/95] 111 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % [FV08575(M )08/93] Using the Illuminated Entry System [FV08600(M )08/93] If your vehicle has this option, the interior lights turn on when you lift the outside door handle on either front door, or when you press UNLOCK, TRUNK, or PANIC on a programmed remote entry transmitter if your vehicle is equipped with remote entry. [FV08625(M )09/95] These lights automatically turn off after 25 seconds or when you turn the ignition key to ON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off if you have turned them on manually or if a door is opened. % [FV08650(M )08/93] Battery Saver (With Remote Entry) *[FV08675(M )09/95] When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will turn off battery voltage to the interior lights after 45 minutes. [FV08700(M )08/93] This will prevent draining of the battery if those lights have been left on inadvertently or if a door is not completely closed. Battery voltage to these lamps will be restored when the outside front door handles are lifted, the Remote Entry transmitter is used to unlock the doors, activate the personal alarm or open the trunk, or the ignition key is turned on again. *[FV08725( ALL)02/95] *[FV08750(MBC )02/95] Replacing the batteries % The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin type three-volt lithium 2016 batteries (included) that should last for several years of normal use. If you notice a significant decrease in operating range, the batteries should be replaced. Replacement batteries can be purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 112 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 *[FV08775( ALL)02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system can also be affected by weather conditions (such as very cold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 33 feet (10 meters) away from your vehicle. *[FV08800(MBC )02/95] quarter page art:0020790-A Replacing the batteries *[FV08825(MBC )02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace the batteries by twisting a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER APART. When installing the new batteries, be sure to place the positive (+) side down as marked. Snap the two halves back together. *[FV08850( ALL)02/95] *[FV08875(MBC )02/95] Replacement/additional transmitters *[FV08900(MBC )02/95] Additional transmitters may be purchased from your dealer (remote entry system will work with up to four transmitters). Return your existing transmitters to your dealer so the remote entry system can be reprogrammed with your new and existing transmitters. % In the event a transmitter is lost, return the remaining transmitters to your dealer for reprogramming of your remote entry system. This is necessary to prevent further unauthorized use of the lost transmitter. 113 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 *[FV08925( ALL)06/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. *[FV08950( ALL)02/95] % [FV08975(M )03/91] * Windows % Using the Power Windows (If equipped) [FV08990(MBC )03/03] Each door has a power control that opens and closes the window on that door. The driver’s door has a master control panel that operates the windows. *[FV09050( ALL)01/95] Power windows can only be opened or closed when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. *[FV09075( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Do not let children play with the power windows. They may seriously hurt themselves. Make sure occupants are clear of the window(s) before closing. 114 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV09100(M )03/95] half page art:0010232-C The master controls on the driver’s door — convertible shown *[FV09400(M GV)05/95] To lock out all window switches except the master controls, press the window lock switch once. To restore control to the individual windows, press the switch again. % There is also an Express Down feature on the driver’s power window. [FV09600(M GV)05/95] To operate, actuate driver’s power window switch to the down position for less than 0.4 seconds; the window will then open automatically. To terminate automatic operation before the window completely opens, operate the switch again, for less than 0.4 seconds, to either the up or down position. Actuating the switch for greater than 0.4 seconds provides conventional power window operation. Closing of the power window is conventional operation only. *[FV09500(M GV)05/95] 115 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % *[FV15700( ALL)01/95] % [FV15710( ALL)04/95] * *[FV15720( ALL)04/95] Seats Head Restraints If you use them properly, head restraints will help protect your head and neck in a collision. *[FV15730( ALL)05/95] A head restraint helps protect you best if you position it behind your head and not behind your neck. *[FV15740( ALL)02/95] *[FV15750( ALL)01/95] Standard head restraints You can adjust the head restraints for your comfort and protection. [FV15770( ALL)05/92] one third page art:0010048-C Adjusting the head restraint [FV15776(M )06/93] The four-way head restraint (standard on GT models) *[FV15785(M )06/95] Your vehicle has the four-way head restraint. You can adjust it in four directions. You can raise it two (2) inches (50 mm) from its normal position, or you can move it forward up to 60˚ until you reach the desired position. 116 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV15790(M )07/93] one third page art:0010049-B The four-way head restraint % [FV15800(MBC )06/93] Adjusting Manual Seats *[FV16000( ALL)02/89] In the front seats, you can move the whole seat forward or backward or tilt the back of the seat forward or backward. [FV16100(MBC )05/92] To move the seats forward or backward: *[FV16300(M )06/95] 1. Find the adjustment lever at the lower left corner of the front seat. *[FV16500(M )08/94] *[FV16600( ALL)08/95] *[FV16800(M )08/95] 2. Push the lever to the left to unlock the seat. 3. Move the seat to the desired position. 4. Release the lever to latch the seat in its new position. Make sure the seat locks securely in place. 117 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV17000(M )06/93] one third page art:0010253-B The front seat adjustment lever *[FV17100(MBC )08/95] *[FV17200( ALL)06/95] To recline the front manual seats: 1. On the side of the seat, find the handle for the recliner. *[FV17300( ALL)08/95] *[FV17400( ALL)01/95] 2. Lift the handle up and hold it in place. 3. Lean against the back of the seat and adjust it to the position you want. You can tilt the seat back or bring it forward. *[FV17500( ALL)08/95] 4. Release the handle to lock the seat in its new position. [FV17510(M )06/93] NOTE: Seat back recline angle is restricted to prevent interference with interior trim panels on convertible models. *[FV17600( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. *[FV17700( ALL)08/95] RWARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 118 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 *[FV17900(MBC )01/95] % Seatback Recline [FV18000(M )06/93] one third page art:0010255-C Front seatback release levers [FV18250(M )05/89] It is necessary to use the seatback release when folding the back of the front seat forward for rear seat passenger entry or exit. This release handle is located on the lower outboard back of the seat. The seatback locks automatically when returned to the normal position. [FV18275(M )03/95] To allow rear seat passenger access, use one hand to pull up on the release handle while the other hand pushes the seatback forward. [FV18450(M )09/89] RWARNING Do not allow packages or other objects to interfere with the normal positions of the seatback or the emergency seatback release. This may prevent the seatback from returning to its upright latched position and could cause personal injury. 119 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % [FV18575(M )05/95] Using the Power Seat (If equipped) [FV18750(M )05/95] If your vehicle has a driver side power seat, you can adjust it in several directions. Using the seat adjustment switch, located on the front outboard corner of the driver’s seat, you can raise or lower the whole front seat and move the seat forward or backward. [FV18835(M )03/92] half page art:0010732-A The seat controls on the driver’s seat *[FV18850( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop. 120 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV19500(M )05/95] Sport Seat Controls (GT models) % [FV19510(M )08/93] Using the Power Lumbar Supports [FV19512(M )08/93] You can inflate a lumbar support pad in the seat back. To inflate the lumbar pad, push the (+) side of the rocker switch. To deflate push the (-) side of the switch. [FV19515(M )08/93] Using the Lateral Support Handwheel (driver only) [FV19520(M )08/93] To increase lateral support rotate the handwheel counterclockwise. To decrease lateral support turn the handwheel clockwise. [FV19600(M )05/95] half page art:0010262-G GT seat controls 121 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % Rear Seat Entry [FV19955(M )03/95] Coupe models *[FV19950(MBC )03/95] [FV20010(M )08/93] one third page art:0011192-A Entering the rear seat (coupe) [FV20100(MBC )03/95] The rotating boot on the lap belt is designed to allow rear seat entry/exit. To enter the rear seat: [FV20250(M )03/95] 1. Remove seat belt from seat belt guide on top of front seat. [FV20350(M )03/95] 2. Rotate the safety belt boot rearward. [FV20403(M )03/95] 3. Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt. [FV20406(M )03/95] 4. Rotate the safety belt boot forward and place the belt in the belt guide on the seat back to allow use by the front seat passengers. 122 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV20410(M )03/95] Convertible models [FV20420(M )08/93] one third page art:0011230-A Entering the rear seat (convertible) [FV20425(M )03/95] To enter the rear seat: [FV20430(M )03/95] 1. Remove the shoulder belt from the seat belt guide on top of front seat. [FV20435(M )08/93] 2. Remove the lap belt from the seat belt guide on side of seat. [FV20440(M )03/95] 3. Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt. [FV20445(M )03/95] 4. Place the lap and shoulder belt into the guides to allow use by the front seat passengers. 123 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % [FV20450(M )12/93] Folding Rear Seat (Coupe only) [FV20455(M )12/93] To fold down the rear seats, gently pull on the release straps. [FV20460(M )12/93] NOTE: It may be necessary to apply slight hand pressure to top of seatback while pulling on release strap. [FV20465(M )12/93] one third page art:0011249-A Rear seat release straps *[FV20470(M )12/93] *[FV20475(M )12/93] To raise the rear seatback: 1. Push the seatback upward until it locks in place. [FV20480(M )12/93] 2. Make sure the seatback is firmly latched by pushing forward and backward on it. *[FV20485(M )05/95] RWARNING Securely latch the seatback in the upright position to prevent the seatback or objects from being thrown forward during a sudden stop or collision. 124 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 *[FV20500( ALL)04/95] *[FV20600( ALL)07/95] *[FV20650( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Seats *[FV20700( ALL)04/95] *[FV20750( ALL)05/95] Fabric *[FV20775( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hidden area of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture is adversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not use it. % % Leather and vinyl For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner or a mild soap. Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directions that come with the cleaner. % Mirrors [FV20810(M )03/94] NOTE: The mirror mount is designed to detach from windshield during air bag deployment. Excessive force and/or excessive up, down, side-to-side adjustment can cause mirror to detach from windshield. *[FV20850( ALL)05/95] You can adjust your rearview mirror in any direction. The special swivel bracket lets you move the mirror up or down and from side to side. *[FV20800( ALL)01/95] [FV21000( ALL)06/95] RWARNING Make sure you can see clearly through the rearview mirror at all times. Do not block your vision. If you cannot see through the mirror, it could result in a collision, injuring yourself and others. 125 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % [FV21100(M )06/93] Rearview Mirror and Lamp Assembly (convertible only) [FV21200(M )03/94] This rearview mirror contains two lamps which function as courtesy lamps when the doors are open. These lamps also function as map lamps when the doors are closed and the rocker switch is activated. [FV21300(M )08/93] one third page art:0010266-B The rearview mirror with lamps 126 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % [FV22700(M )06/93] Adjusting the Side View Mirrors [FV24200(M C )06/93] The switch for controlling the dual electric remote control mirrors is located on the driver’s door. *[FV24400( ALL)01/95] % Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. [FV24520(M )03/95] half page art:0010272-C The mirror controls on the driver’s door *[FV24700( ALL)04/95] *[FV24800( ALL)01/95] *[FV24900( ALL)06/94] [FV25000( ALL)06/93] *[FV25100( ALL)06/94] To adjust the side mirrors: 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s door panel. 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the selector switch to R or L. 3. Move the knob in the direction of the arrows for the direction you want to move the mirror. 4. Return the selector switch to the middle position to keep the mirror in place. 127 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV28700( ALL)01/89] The Right Side Convex Mirror *[FV28800( ALL)02/94] The side view mirror on the right is a convex mirror. This mirror gives you a wider view of the lanes on your right and behind you. *[FV28900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING The side view mirror on the right makes objects appear smaller and farther away than they actually are. *[FV28950( ALL)05/95] % [FV29100( ALL)05/94] * % [FV29300( ALL)06/93] Sun Visors Turning on the Mirror Light on the Sun Visors (If equipped) To turn on the visor mirror light, lift the mirror cover. [FV29700(M )08/93] one third page art:0010276-B The mirror on the sun visor 128 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % Console [FV30350(MBC )06/93] Your vehicle has a full console. The full console has the features shown in the illustration below. *[FV30200(MBC )01/95] [FV30400(M )08/93] half page art:0010281-E The features on the full console 129 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % Power Point Electrical Outlet [FV32750(M )10/95] The power point outlet is located on the console to the right of the shift lever. This outlet should be used in place of the cigarette lighter for optional electrical accessories. [FV32775(M )09/95] NOTE: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Electrical system damage could occur. *[FV32725(M GV)03/95] [FV32801(M )08/93] half page art:0011193-A Power point electrical outlet [FV32825(M )08/93] To access the outlet, flip the cover down. 130 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % *[FV32875( ALL)01/95] *[FV32900(M GV)01/95] [FV32910(M )05/94] [FV32920(M )05/94] Storage Compartments Your vehicle may have several small storage compartments: ❑ a glove compartment that locks. ❑ if equipped with power windows, two map pockets on the panels of the front doors. [FV32923(M )05/94] ❑ center console storage compartment under the arm rest that may be used for storage of CD’s or cassettes. [FV32924(M )05/95] ❑ coin holders located behind the ashtray. These are deleted if fog lamps or convertible top are ordered. *[FV33300( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Do not put objects on the ledge between the back seat and the rear window, as they can become dangerous projectiles and injure someone. *[FV33400( ALL)01/95] *[FV33500( ALL)01/95] % Trunk Opening the Trunk Manually [FV33600(M )05/94] The trunk in your vehicle gives you plenty of room for storage: [FV33700(M )06/93] ❑ coupe — 10.8 cubic feet (.31 cubic meters) ❑ convertible — 8.5 cubic feet (.24 cubic meters) [FV33900(M )06/93] *[FV34600( ALL)03/95] % [FV34900(M )06/93] [FV35100( ALL)11/90] [FV35300( ALL)11/90] [FV35450( ALL)06/93] To open and close the trunk from the outside: 1. Insert the key into the lock to the right of the license plate. 2. Turn the key to the right until the trunk opens. 3. Remove the key before you close and lock the lid. 4. Shut the trunk lid completely. 131 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % [FV36200( ALL)03/95] Using the Remote Control for the Trunk (If equipped) [FV36400(M )08/93] You can use the remote control inside your glove compartment to unlock and open the trunk. If equipped, you can also use your remote entry system to open the trunk. [FV36600(M )01/89] quarter page art:0010286-A The remote control for the trunk % [FV37300(M )12/94] Convertible (If equipped) [FV37650(M )09/95] NOTE: Do not store articles behind rear seat. Articles stored in the convertible top stowage compartment may break the rear glass window when the top is lowered. % [FV38600(M )01/89] Lowering the Convertible Top [FV38700(M )03/93] The convertible top can be lowered with the side windows either up or down. [FV38750(M )09/95] NOTE: CONVERTIBLE TOP WILL NOT OPERATE UNLESS PARKING BRAKE IS ENGAGED. Do not lower the top while the vehicle is moving because the top may be severely damaged. Also, do not lower the top when the top material is wet. [FV38800(M )01/89] To lower the convertible top: [FV38850(M )03/93] 1. 132 Bring vehicle to a complete stop. Engage the parking brake. File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV38855(M )06/93] 2. Check the convertible top stowage compartment behind the rear seat to be sure it is empty and ready to receive the top. [FV38900(M )06/93] 3. Unclamp the top from the windshield header at both the right and left sides by pulling each clamp rearward until the hook in the windshield header is free. The clamps are flush with the header when in the closed position. [FV39000(M )06/93] 4. Close the windshield header clamps immediately after disengagement, to avoid cutting the top material and to permit installation of the vinyl boot. [FV39100(M )06/93] 5. If the top has not been lowered for some time and sticks to the windshield header, push the front of the top up slightly with your hand to loosen it. [FV39200(M )05/94] one third page art:0010289-C Convertible top header clamps [FV39700(M )05/94] 6. Push the convertible top switch on the console in front of the armrest and hold until the top is completely stored. 133 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV39710(M )06/93] one third page art:0011189-A Convertible top switch % [FV40200(M )03/93] Installation of the Boot [FV40400(M )03/93] To install the boot: [FV40501(M )05/95] 1. [FV40601(M )05/95] half page art:0011356-A 134 Insert boot tongue into groove located on rear seat. File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV40650(M )05/95] 2. Push boot forward until rear attachment engages under molding. 3. Push forward flap of boot until both clips engage under trim panel edge. Repeat on other side of car. [FV40701(M )05/95] one third page art:0011357-A [FV40750(M )05/95] [FV40801(M )05/95] half page art:0011358-A 135 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV40901(M )05/95] 4. Tuck side attachments under molding. Repeat on other side of car. 5. Push and pull front of boot to ensure tongue is engaged into groove. [FV40950(M )05/95] one third page art:0011359-A [FV41001(M )05/95] [FV41101(M )05/95] one third page art:0011360-A 136 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV41150(M )05/95] 6. Removal [FV41201(M )05/95] one third page art:0011361-A % [FV41600(M )01/89] Raising the Convertible Top [FV41700(M )09/95] NOTE: CONVERTIBLE TOP WILL NOT OPERATE UNLESS PARKING BRAKE IS ENGAGED. Do not raise the top while the vehicle is moving because the top may be severely damaged. [FV41800(M )01/89] To raise the convertible top: [FV41850(M )02/93] 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Engage the parking brake. [FV41900(M )06/93] 2. Remove the boot cover, place it in the bag and store it in the luggage compartment. [FV41950(M )03/93] 3. Lower the front and rear side windows. [FV42000(M )06/93] 4. Push the convertible top button in, holding it until the top unfolds and moves forward toward the windshield header. [FV42100(M )03/93] 5. Open both top clamps before the top meets the windshield header. [FV42200(M )03/93] 6. Continue to use the top motor to raise the top until it has reached the fully closed position flush to the header. 137 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 [FV42300(M )03/93] 7. The two pins under the forward edge of the top should seat themselves in the matching holes in the header. [FV42400(M )06/93] 8. To fasten both clamps securely, push the clamp handles into the header on the top until they are flush with the header. Pulling down on the header at the center grip while closing the latches may assist in fastening the clamps. [FV42410(M )03/93] 9. Raise the front and rear side windows. % [FV42412(M )03/95] Convertible Top and Padded Molding Care [FV42414(M )03/95] To avoid damage to the vinyl top and moldings, use only an approved Ford cleaner, or equivalent. Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive material or cleaners. [FV42416(M )03/95] Hot waxes applied by automatic car washes can affect the cleanability of vinyl material. [FV42418(M )03/95] NOTE: Using high water pressure or wand type car washes against the convertible top and windows may cause water leaks and possible seal damage. 138 File:08rcfvm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:32:34 1996 % [FV47500( ALL)08/93] Positive Location Floor Mat [FV47600(MBC )08/93] When installing or removing the driver’s side floor mat you must attach/detach the positive location grommet from the hook on the floor. The hook is just forward of the left hand track of the driver’s seat. [FV47800(MBC )08/93] half page art:0010758-A The positive location floor mat hook 139 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 % [AS21350(MBC )02/95] full page art:0060641-B Electronic Sound Systems Electronic Stereo Radio with Cassette 141 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 % [AS21370(MBC )06/95] Electronic Stereo Cassette Radio *[AS21400(MBC )08/95] *[AS21500(MBC )08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio *[AS22050(MBC )10/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it again to turn it off. *[AS22060(MBC )04/94] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase the volume. Press the left (s) side of the button to decrease the volume. Illuminated bars in the display show the relative volume level. *[AS22070(MBC )10/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain in the position it was set at when radio power was switched off. *[AS22100(MBC )10/95] *[AS22250(MBC )02/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band How to turn the radio on and adjust the volume Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape (when in cassette mode). Pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons described under How to tune radio stations. % How to tune radio stations [AS22425(MBC )06/95] There are four ways for you to tune in to a particular station. You can manually locate the station by using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”) button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. *[AS22300(MBC )10/95] 142 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 [AS22450(MBC )05/95] ❑ Using the “AMS” function to manually tune your radio [AS22650(MBC )03/95] You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time by first pressing the “AMS” button, (display shows “TUNE”) then pressing and releasing either the right a or left b side of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “SEEK” button. *[AS22700(MBC )10/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) *[AS22800(MBC )10/95] *[AS22900(MBC )09/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function *[AS23150(MBC )01/95] *[AS23175(MBC )06/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b) side of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By holding the button down, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The radio will begin scanning up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately a five-second sampling. This continues until you press the “SCAN” button a second time. The display flashes “AM” or “FM.” 143 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS23200(MBC )10/95] *[AS23300(MBC )10/95] ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons *[AS23400(MBC )10/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies: *[AS23500(MBC )10/95] *[AS23700(MBC )10/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. *[AS23800(MBC )10/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set. [AS23900(MBC )09/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the station memory preset buttons will need to be reset. *[AS24000(MBC )10/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of your radio *[AS24100(MBC )10/95] *[AS24250(MBC )06/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response *[AS24300(MBC )10/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2). Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase bass (more “lows”), and push the left (s) side to decrease bass (less “lows”). Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase treble (more “highs”), and push the left (S) side to decrease treble (less “highs”). [AS24450(MBC )06/95] 144 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS24500(MBC )08/95] *[AS24600(MBC )10/95] *[AS24750(MBC )06/95] Speaker features and operation *[AS24800(MBC )10/95] *[AS24950(MBC )06/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker fader *[AS24960(MBC )10/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of bass and treble, and positions of speaker balance and fader functions (left to right, front to rear). ❑ Adjusting speaker balance Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift the sound to the left speakers. Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. % Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player *[AS25400(M )08/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the cassette tape player. *[AS25500(MBC )08/95] *[AS25600(MBC )08/95] How to insert a tape *[AS25000(MBC )08/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to the right) firmly into the tape door opening, making sure the cassette is completely in and “seated.” 145 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS25700(MBC )08/95] *[AS25800(MBC )06/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape [AS25830(M )07/94] ❑ Using the Automatic Music Search NOTE: The tape track or side number indicated in the display does not necessarily correspond to the tape track or side number on the cassette label. It is used only to indicate when the tape mechanism reverses tracks. Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS” will appear in the display). Then, push the left h button to rewind to the beginning of the current selection or press the right g button to fast forward to the beginning of the next selection. * [AS25850(MBC )09/95] )09/95] *[AS25950(M [AS26000(MBC )08/95] * ❑ Fast forwarding the tape )08/95] *[AS26150(M *[AS26200(MBC )08/95] *[AS26900(MBC )08/95] *[AS27000(MBC )06/95] ❑ Rewinding the tape *[AS27100(MBC )08/95] *[AS27250(MBC )08/95] How to eject the tape *[AS27300(MBC )08/95] *[AS27400(MBC )08/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature Push the right g button to fast forward the tape. Push the left h button to rewind the tape. ❑ How to change the side of the tape being played The alternate track (other side) of the tape can be selected at any time by pushing both fast-wind buttons h and g at the same time. To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJECT” button. The radio will resume playing. NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. 146 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS27500(MBC )08/95] Push the k/memory preset #3 button to activate. Push again to deactivate. *[AS27600(MBC )08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes *[AS27700(MBC )08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions: *[AS27750(MBC )08/95] ❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to *[AS27800(MBC )08/95] ❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or *[AS27900(MBC )08/95] ❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct *[AS28001(MBC )08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it *[AS28101(MBC )08/95] ❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become *[AS28200(MBC )08/95] ❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the best playback sound and proper tape operation. less should be used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism. sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate temperature before playing. before playing by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and turning the hub until the tape is tight. lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting a cassette. player when not in use. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp. 147 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 % [AS28600(M )05/94] full page art:0060665-A Ford Mini Disc Player 148 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 [AS28650(M )03/95] Ford Mini Disc Player [AS28700(M )05/94] The Ford Mini Disc Player operates when the Audio System is on and a disc is inserted (label side up). (Be sure to read and follow all of the care and cleaning instructions under How To Take Care of Your Mini Disc Player and Discs in this section.) [AS28800(M )05/94] The digital display on your Mini Disc player shows the track (selection) number and the disc title. [AS28900(M )05/94] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the Mini Disc player will override that of the cassette player or radio. [AS29000(M )05/94] Using the Controls on Your New Mini Disc Player [AS29100(M )09/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and fader controls on the radio are also used with the Mini Disc player. Refer to Using the Controls on Your New Radio in this section for operating instructions on these controls. *[AS29200(M )10/95] How to insert a disc and begin play [AS29300(M )05/94] Insert one disc, label side up into the disc opening. Arrow on top of disc must point inward. When inserted, the disc automatically loads into the unit and play starts at the beginning of the first track (selection). *[AS29400(M )10/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc player automatically returns to the beginning of the disc and resumes playing. *[AS29500(M )09/95] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc opening is secured to prevent the accidental insertion of a second disc. 149 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 [AS29600(M )09/95] NOTE: The Mini Disc player has heat protection circuitry to protect the laser diode. If the temperature of the player reaches 167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuit will shut off the player and “HOT” will appear in the display. When the temperature is within normal operating range, the “HOT” indication will turn off and the Mini Disc player will again be operational. [AS29700(M )09/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF during play and then is set to the ON or ACCESSORY position, the Mini Disc player will resume playing in the mode it was in when ignition was turned off. [AS29800(M )05/94] How to fast forward or rewind your Mini Disc player [AS29900(M )03/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press the right (e) side of the “REV/FF” button (to fast forward) or the left (f) side (to rewind). While either side of the button is pressed, the disc goes forward or backward at two different speeds depending on how long the button is held down. (Pressing the button for more than approximately 5 seconds will speed up the process.) Release the button at the desired point (found by watching the elapsed playing time in the display or by listening to the sound during fast forward or rewind). [AS30000(M )03/95] When you have reached the end of the disc by keeping the fast forward (e) side of the button pressed, the display will show the end time of the last track and the sound will be muted. When the fast forward (e) side of the button is released, the player resumes play at the beginning of the first track. 150 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 [AS30200(M )05/94] Using the “SCROLL” feature [AS30300(M )05/94] The scroll feature allows the display to scroll through titles that are larger than 12 characters. [AS30400(M )05/94] Press the “SCROLL” button to activate the scroll feature. [AS30420(M )05/94] Using the “AMS” feature [AS30440(M )03/95] Pressing the right (e) side of the “AMS” button advances the disc forward one track at a time. [AS30445(M )03/95] Pressing the left (f) side of the “AMS” button brings the disc back to the beginning of the current track. Pressing and holding the left (f) or right (e) side of the “AMS” button will scroll backward or forward respectively through the tracks. [AS30460(M )05/94] Using the display feature [AS30480(M )07/94] Three different displays can be shown. Pressing the “DISPLAY” button will toggle between track # and disc title, song title, and track # and elapsed time. [AS30482(M )07/94] When a disc is ejected and another inserted, the display will show the same selected display as the disc that was ejected. *[AS30500(M )10/95] How to eject the disc [AS30600(M )05/94] Push the “EJECT” button in the upper left corner of your Mini Disc player to stop play, eject the disc and resume radio or tape operation of your audio system. 151 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 % [AS30700(M )11/94] How To Take Care of and Clean Your Mini Disc Player and Discs [AS30800(M )05/94] To ensure the continued performance, of your Ford Mini Disc Player carefully read the following precautions. *[AS30900(M )08/95] ❑ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never *[AS31100(M )08/95] ❑ Do not clean discs with solvents such as *[AS31200(M )08/95] ❑ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or *[AS31300(M )08/95] *[AS31400(M )08/95] ❑ After playing, store the disc in its case. ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try *[AS31500(M )08/95] ❑ Do not insert anything other than a disc into *[AS31600(M )08/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard as the laser beam used in this compact disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. touch the playing surface. benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intended for analog records. heat sources such as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be a considerable rise in temperature or damage may result. to insert another disc. Doing so may damage the disc player. the disc player. 152 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 [AS31700(M )07/94] Common Operating Conditions of Your Mini Disc Player *[AS31800(M )08/95] The following information is designed to help you recognize typical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted as mechanical malfunctions of the disc player. *[AS31900(M )08/95] *[AS32000(M )08/95] ❑ A disc is already loaded. ❑ The disc is inserted with the label surface *[AS32100(M )08/95] *[AS32200(M )05/95] ❑ The disc is dusty or defective. ❑ The player’s internal temperature is above [AS32300(M )05/94] ❑ Different manufacturers of compact discs may downward. 167˚F (75˚C). Allow the player to cool off before operating. produce discs with different dimensions or tolerances, some of which may not be within industry standards or in accordance with the Mini Disc format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dust and scratches could be defective and may not play on your Ford Mini Disc Player. *[AS32400(M )09/95] If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed: *[AS32500(M )08/95] *[AS32600(M )08/95] *[AS32700(M )08/95] ❑ The radio is not on. ❑ The unit is in the stop mode. ❑ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses *[AS32800(M )08/95] *[AS32900(M )08/95] If the sound skips: within the unit. If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately an hour until the moisture evaporates. ❑ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc player or scratch the discs. 153 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 % [AS38050(M )02/95] full page art:0060593-B Ford Compact Disc Player 154 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS38075(M )05/95] *[AS38100(M )03/95] Ford Compact Disc Player The Ford Compact Disc Player operates when the Audio System is on and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handle the disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read and follow all of the care and cleaning instructions under How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs in this section.) *[AS38200(M )06/95] The digital display on your CD player shows the track (selection) number and the elapsed time. Indicators for play a, stop X, compression on (“COMP”) and shuffle on (“SHUF”) are also in the display. (These features are described later.) [AS38210(M )06/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CD player will override that of the cassette player or radio. % Using the Controls on Your New Compact Disc Player [AS38270(M )09/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance and fader controls on the radio are also used with the CD player. Refer to Using the Controls on Your New Radio in this section for operating instructions on these controls. *[AS38300(M )10/95] How to insert a disc and begin play [AS38310(M )03/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the disc opening. When inserted, the disc automatically loads into the unit and play starts at the beginning of the first track (selection). The play indicator (a) lights up and the number “1” (track) and “0:00” (elapsed time) are shown in the digital display. *[AS38320(M )10/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc player automatically returns to the beginning of the disc and resumes playing. *[AS38250(M )10/95] 155 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS38330(M )10/95] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the disc opening is secured to prevent the accidental insertion of a second disc. [AS38340(M )03/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protection circuitry to protect the laser diode. If the temperature of the player reaches 167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuit will shut off the player and “HOT” will appear in the display. When the temperature is within normal operating range, the “HOT” indication will turn off and the CD player will again be operational. *[AS38400(M )10/95] How to stop and restart the CD player [AS38450(M )03/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automatically enters the play mode and the play indicator (a) illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the “PLAY/STOP” button. The stop indicator (X) in the display illuminates and operation returns to the radio or tape mode. To resume CD play, press this button once again or press any other function button (except “EJECT” or “COMPRESS” buttons). *[AS38475(M )10/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFF during play and then is set to the ON or ACCESSORY position, the CD player will resume playing in the mode it was in when ignition was turned off. *[AS38500(M )03/95] How to locate a selection on your CD player using Automatic Music Search (AMS) *[AS38510(M )06/95] An “AMS” (Automatic Music Search) control on your CD player allows you to quickly find a particular selection on the disc. Press the left f side of the “AMS” control to locate a previous selection or the right e side of the “AMS” control to locate a later selection. 156 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS38550(M )10/95] How to fast forward or reverse your CD player [AS38560(M )06/95] To quickly search for a particular point in a selection, press the right (e) side of the “REV/FF” button (to fast forward) or the left (f) side (to rewind). While either side of the button is pressed, the disc goes forward or backward at two different speeds depending on how long the button is held down. (Pressing the button for more than a couple seconds will speed up the process.) Release the button at the desired point (found by watching the elapsed playing time in the display or by listening to the sound during fast forward or rewind). *[AS38580(M )06/95] When you have reached the end of the disc by keeping the fast forward e side of the button pressed, the display will show the end time of the last track and the sound will be muted. When the fast forward e side of the button is released, the player resumes play at the beginning of the first track. *[AS38600(M )06/95] A “1” and “0:00” will appear in the display when the beginning of the disc is reached by pressing the rewind f side of the button. *[AS38620(M )10/95] *[AS38630(M )03/95] Using the “SCAN” function Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scan mode. The CD player will begin scanning the disc, stopping on each listenable track for approximately eight seconds. This continues until you press the “SCAN” button a second time or eject the disc. While in the scan mode, the display flashes “SCAN.” 157 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS39050(M )07/94] *[AS39100(M )10/95] *[AS39110(M )10/95] Special Features of Your CD Player ❑ Compression The compression feature will bring soft and loud passages closer together for a more consistent listening level. To turn the compression on, press the “COMPRESS” button. When on, the compression indicator (“COMP”) will appear in the display. Press the button again to turn off. *[AS39120(M )03/95] *[AS39150(M )03/95] *[AS39160(M )03/95] ❑ Shuffle The shuffle feature on your CD player allows you to listen to your disc selections in a different order. When this feature is activated, your CD player will randomly select and play tracks on the disc. Press the “SHUFFLE” button to turn on, press it again to turn off. When on, the shuffle indicator (“SHUF”) will appear in the display. When the player is between selections, the display will show a moving dash (“s”) around the perimeter of the display. *[AS39170(M )03/95] *[AS39200(M )03/95] *[AS39210(M )03/95] ❑ Shuffle and Scan *[AS39250(M )10/95] ❑ Automatic Disc Storage Both the shuffle and scan features can be activated simultaneously. In this mode, the player will randomly pick a selection and play the first eight seconds. This process is continued until either the “SCAN” button or “SHUFFLE” button is pressed a second time. If the disc is ejected from the CD player but is not removed from the disc opening within approximately 15 seconds, the player will automatically reload the disc for storage. [AS39260(M )03/95] 158 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS39300(M )10/95] *[AS39310(M )06/95] How to eject the disc Push the “EJECT” button in the upper left corner of your CD player to stop play, eject the disc and resume radio or tape operation of your audio system. % How To Take Care of and Clean Your CD Player and Discs *[AS41301(M )08/95] To ensure the continued performance of your Ford Compact Disc Player, carefully read the following precautions: *[AS41401(M )08/95] ❑ Always handle the disc by its edge. Never *[AS41501(M )08/95] ❑ Before playing, inspect the disc for any *[AS41601(M )08/95] ❑ Do not clean discs with solvents such as *[AS41701(M )08/95] ❑ Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or *[AS41801(M )08/95] *[AS41901(M )08/95] ❑ After playing, store the disc in its case. ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not try *[AS42001(M )08/95] ❑ Do not insert anything other than a disc into *[AS41201(M )08/95] touch the playing surface. contamination. If needed, clean the disc with an approved disc cleaner, such as the DiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to the edges. Do not use a circular motion to clean. benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intended for analog records. heat sources such as defroster and floor heating ducts. Do not leave any discs in a parked car in direct sunlight where there may be a considerable rise in temperature or damage may result. to insert another disc. Doing so may damage the disc player. the disc player. 159 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS42101(M )08/95] CAUTION: The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard as the laser beam used in this compact disc player is harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the case. Refer servicing to qualified personnel only. *[AS42201(M )08/95] Common Operating Conditions of Your CD Player *[AS42301(M )08/95] The following information is designed to help you recognize typical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted as mechanical malfunctions of the disc player. *[AS42401(M )08/95] *[AS42501(M )08/95] ❑ A disc is already loaded. ❑ The disc is inserted with the label surface *[AS42601(M )08/95] *[AS42701(M )05/95] ❑ The disc is dusty or defective. ❑ The player’s internal temperature is above *[AS42801(M )08/95] ❑ Different manufacturers of compact discs may downward. 167˚F (75˚C). Allow the player to cool off before operating. produce discs with different dimensions or tolerances, some of which may not be within industry standards or in accordance with the CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dust and scratches could be defective and may not play on your Ford Compact Disc Player. 160 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS42901(M )09/95] If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed: *[AS43001(M )08/95] *[AS43101(M )08/95] *[AS43201(M )08/95] ❑ The radio is not on. ❑ The unit is in the stop mode. ❑ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses *[AS43301(M )08/95] *[AS43401(M )08/95] If the sound skips: within the unit. If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately an hour until the moisture evaporates. ❑ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will cause the sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc player or scratch the discs. 161 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 % [AS43457(M )05/94] full page art:0060575-C Mach 460 Sound System 162 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 [AS43459(M )03/95] Mach 460 Sound System *[AS43460(MBC )08/95] *[AS43470(MBC )10/95] *[AS43480(MBC )10/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio *[AS43500(MBC )10/95] How to adjust the volume [AS43510(MBC )06/95] Press the +/s side of the “VOLUME” button to increase/decrease volume. Bars illuminate in the display to show the relative volume level. *[AS43520(MBC )10/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain in the position it was set at when radio power was switched off. *[AS43530(MBC )10/95] *[AS43540(MBC )02/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band *[AS43550(MBC )10/95] *[AS43560(MBC )10/95] How to tune radio stations % How to turn the radio on and off Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on. Press it again to turn it off. Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape (when in cassette mode). Pushing the button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons described under How to tune radio stations. There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You can manually locate the station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or select the station by using the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired frequency. These four methods are described below. 163 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS43570(MBC )09/95] *[AS43580(MBC )08/95] ❑ Using the “TUNE” function You can change the frequency up or down one increment at a time (FM changes in increments of 200 kHz; AM changes in increments of 10 kHz) by first pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows “TUNE”), then — within approximately five seconds — pressing and releasing either the right (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK” button. To change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of the “SEEK” button. Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast frequency, whether or not a station is present on that frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.) *[AS43590(MBC )10/95] *[AS43600(MBC )10/95] *[AS43610(MBC )09/95] ❑ Using the “SEEK” function This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b) side of the button to select the next listenable station down the frequency band. By holding the button down, listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired station. 164 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS43630(MBC )01/95] *[AS43640(MBC )03/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button once enters the scan mode (display will indicate “SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode up the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for approximately a five-second sampling. Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scan mode down the frequency band, again stopping on each listenable station for approximately a five-second sampling. *[AS43650(MBC )10/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE” button again. *[AS43670(MBC )10/95] *[AS43680(MBC )10/95] ❑ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons *[AS43690(MBC )10/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired frequencies: *[AS43700(MBC )10/95] *[AS43720(MBC )10/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency. 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the button until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory on that button. *[AS43730(MBC )10/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset button you want to set. Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons. These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2). 165 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS43750(MBC )10/95] *[AS43760(MBC )10/95] ❑ Using the Automatic Memory Load feature If no stations are in memory preset, you can activate the Auto Memory Load feature by pressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET” button for approximately three seconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seeking out the first six strong stations for the respective band and storing them in memory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set of strong stations from the FM band.) *[AS43770(MBC )10/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strong stations into your memory buttons without losing your existing memory presets, which is especially handy while traveling. Your radio will automatically set your memory buttons to the strong local stations so you don’t have to continually manually tune to existing stations. *[AS43780(MBC )10/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio will set the first five strong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory buttons. The display will show “AUTO,” then run through the frequencies, stopping momentarily on the stations being set into the memory buttons. The radio is now in the “AUTO” mode and the display will show “AUTO” each time a preset is activated. *[AS43790(MBC )10/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in the frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will store the last strong station detected on the band. 166 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS43800(MBC )10/95] After all stations have been filled, the radio will begin playing the station stored on memory button 1. *[AS43810(MBC )10/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to the manually-set memory button stations (or those stations set using Auto Memory Load), simply push the “AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF.” The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band, the radio will store the next set of five strong stations. *[AS43830(MBC )10/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of your radio *[AS43850(MBC )10/95] *[AS43860(MBC )06/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response *[AS43870(MBC )10/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response [AS43880(MBC )06/95] *[AS43890(MBC )10/95] *[AS43900(MBC )06/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase bass (more “lows”), and push the left (s) side to decrease bass (less “lows”). Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to increase treble (more “highs”), and push the left (S) side to decrease treble (less “highs”). ❑ Adjusting speaker balance Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and left speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “BAL.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift the sound to the left speakers. 167 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS44010(MBC )10/95] *[AS44020(MBC )06/95] ❑ Adjusting speaker fader *[AS44030(MBC )10/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of bass and treble, and positions of speaker balance and fader functions (left to right, front to rear). Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution between the front and rear speakers. Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly until the display reads “FADE.” Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” button to shift the sound to the front speakers, and push the left (s) side to shift the sound to the rear speakers. % Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player *[AS44050(MBC )09/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the cassette tape player or eject a tape. [AS44060(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Adjust the volume, treble, bass, balance and fader controls in the same manner as for radio stations. *[AS44070(MBC )08/95] *[AS44080(MBC )08/95] How to insert a tape *[AS44040(MBC )08/95] *[AS44090(MBC )09/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped with power loading. Once you insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to the right), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of the way in and play will begin after a momentary tape tightening process. Display indicates “M” (for metal/CrO2) while tape is playing. NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded and stored with the ignition and radio power off. 168 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS44100(MBC )08/95] *[AS44110(MBC )08/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape *[AS44120(MBC )09/95] ❑ Fast forwarding the tape There are four ways to quickly locate a desired selection on the tape. You can use the fast forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function. Following are brief descriptions of each. [AS44140(MBC )02/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF” button. The radio will automatically begin playing until fast forward is manually stopped (by pushing the “PLAY PROG” button) or the end of the tape is reached. *[AS44160(MBC )01/95] At the end of the tape, the direction automatically reverses and plays the other side of the tape. [AS44170(MBC )02/95] [AS44180(MBC )02/95] *[AS44190(MBC )08/95] [AS44200(MBC )03/95] ❑ Fast rewinding the tape To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button. The radio will automatically begin playing when rewind is manually stopped (by pushing the “PLAY PROG” button) or the beginning of the tape is reached. ❑ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette tape player While in the tape mode, push the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on the tape. Push the left (b) side to seek the beginning of the current tape selection. *[AS44210(MBC )09/95] NOTE: If you want to restart a currently playing tape selection, press the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button after approximately three seconds into the current selection. *[AS44220(MBC )08/95] Whirling sprockets in the display (l) indicate the direction of tape travel. 169 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS44230(MBC )08/95] ❑ Using the “SCAN” function with your cassette tape player *[AS44240(MBC )08/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter the scan mode (display indicates “SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button will begin the forward scan mode on the tape currently playing, stopping on each tape selection for approximately an eight-second sampling. *[AS44250(MBC )08/95] Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button will begin the reverse scan mode, stopping on each previous tape selection for approximately an eight-second sampling. While scanning, the display indicates whirling sprockets plus an “S” (m). *[AS44260(MBC )08/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tape selection press the “SCAN/TUNE” button again. *[AS44270(MBC )08/95] ❑ How to change the side of the tape being played The alternate side of the tape can be selected at any time by pressing the “PLAY/PROG” button. [AS44280(MBC )02/95] *[AS44300(MBC )08/95] *[AS44310(MBC )08/95] How to eject the tape To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJCT” button. The radio will resume playing if the radio power is on. The tape cartridge can be ejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on or off. 170 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS44320(MBC )08/95] *[AS44330(MBC )08/95] How to store the tape Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape player and resume radio play. The cassette will be stored in the tape player and the X symbol in the display will be lit until you push the “PLAY PROG” button to resume tape play. Fast forward and fast rewind can be used while the tape is in storage mode without interrupting radio play. *[AS44340(MBC )08/95] *[AS44350(MBC )08/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature *[AS44360(MBC )04/95] Push the k button to activate Dolby B Noise Reduction. Push again to deactivate. *[AS44490(MBC )08/95] *[AS44500(MBC )08/95] Tape error messages *[AS44510(MBC )08/95] Error 0 — Communication error between the radio controller and the tape controller. The cassette player will eject the tape. Insert the tape again. If the same error code appears, turn the ignition off, then back on again and insert the tape. *[AS44520(MBC )08/95] Error 1 — Possible problem cartridge. The cassette tape player will eject the tape. Insert the tape again. If the same error code appears in the display, try a different cartridge. NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Your cassette tape player is equipped to diagnose certain problems you may experience. Error codes are as follows: 171 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS44530(MBC )08/95] Error 2 — Tape eject or load failure. Your cassette tape player will go into the pause mode. Push “EJCT” to eject the tape. If the tape doesn’t eject, refer the problem to qualified personnel for service. *[AS44540(MBC )08/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes *[AS44550(MBC )08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions: *[AS44560(MBC )08/95] ❑ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to *[AS44570(MBC )08/95] ❑ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or *[AS44580(MBC )08/95] ❑ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct *[AS44590(MBC )08/95] ❑ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become *[AS44600(MBC )08/95] ❑ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the best playback sound and proper tape operation. less should be used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism. sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate temperature before playing. lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting cassette. player. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp. 172 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS60900( ALL)08/95] *[AS61000( ALL)08/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions *[AS61100( ALL)08/95] *[AS61200( ALL)08/95] 1. *[AS61300( ALL)06/90] NOTE: Always make sure your antenna (whether you have a power antenna or a manually adjustable antenna) is fully extended to the maximum length for proper reception. If your antenna is not fully extended, you may experience signal loss while traveling in fringe reception areas. *[AS61400( ALL)08/95] *[AS61500( ALL)08/95] 2. *[AS61700( ALL)08/95] If there is a building or large structure between the antenna and station, some of the signal “bends” around the building, but certain spots receive almost no signal. Moving out of the “shadow” of the structure will allow the station to return to normal. *[AS61800( ALL)08/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects or structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and distortion. Cancellation effects are most prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can become quite severe in hilly terrain and depressed roadways. % Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completely clear and noise-free, such as the following: Distance/Strength The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance the signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FM signal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signal becomes weaker. Terrain The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area over which the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from being noise-free. 173 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS61900( ALL)08/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono blend circuit has been incorporated into this system. This feature automatically switches a weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal, which improves the quality of reception. *[AS62000( ALL)08/95] Several sources of static are normal conditions on AM frequencies. These can be caused by power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms. *[AS62100( ALL)08/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal Capture and Overload. This can occur when listening to a weak station and when passing another broadcast tower. The close station may capture the more distant station, although the displayed frequency does not change. While passing the tower, the station may switch back and forth a few times before returning to the original station. *[AS62200( ALL)08/95] When several broadcast towers are present (common in metropolitan areas) several stations may overload the receiver, resulting in considerable station changing, mixing and distortion. *[AS62300( ALL)08/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM and FM bands has been incorporated into this system to reduce strong signal capture and overload. *[AS62400( ALL)08/95] *[AS62500( ALL)08/95] All About Radio Frequencies % The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) establish the frequencies that AM and FM radio stations may use for their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are, AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz steps. 174 File:09rcasm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:20 1996 *[AS62600( ALL)08/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given area. This radio will tune to each of these frequencies using manual tune and no fine tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use other frequencies. *[AS62700( ALL)08/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a “rounded-off” frequency which is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. For example, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99” even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM broadcast frequency. *[AS62800( ALL)08/95] % *[AS62900( ALL)07/90] *[AS63000( ALL)08/95] *[AS63200( ALL)07/90] *[AS63300( ALL)08/95] Important Warranty and Service Information ❑ Warranty Your sound system is warranted for three years or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty booklet for further information. Ask your dealer for a copy of this limited warranty. ❑ Service At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio systems with a comprehensive service and repair program. If anything should go wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealer for service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist you. 175 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 Driving Your Mustang *[DR00200(M )06/95] Procedures for driving your vehicle will vary depending on which type of transmission your vehicle has. [DR00300(M )03/95] ❑ an automatic overdrive transmission with transmission control switch *[DR00400(M )06/95] %*[DR00500( ALL)03/93] ❑ a manual transmission Driving with an Automatic Overdrive Transmission [DR00510(MBC )05/94] The gearshift lever is floor mounted. *[DR00800( ALL)01/95] *[DR00950( ALL)05/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear % RWARNING Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from position to position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. [DR00965(MBC )03/95] To move the shifter out of P (Park), the ignition key must be turned to either the OFF or the ON position and the thumb button must be pushed in. This vehicle is also equipped with the brake shift interlock safety feature which prevents shifting the transmission out of the P (Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed if the key is in the ON position. *[DR00975( ALL)03/95] *[DR00980( ALL)01/95] *[DR00985( ALL)01/95] To operate: 1. Start the engine. 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 177 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR00990( ALL)01/95] % [DR00995( ALL)04/95] * 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park). *[DR01000( ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignition key. *[DR01005( ALL)01/95] *[DR01010( ALL)01/95] 2. Apply parking brake. 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwise to the first position (OFF). *[DR01020( ALL)01/95] 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine. Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift Interlock safety feature. This feature prevents the gearshift from being moved from the P (Park) position until the brake pedal is depressed. This feature is active when the ignition is in the ON position. If the gearshift lever CANNOT be moved from P (Park) with the brake pedal depressed: *[DR01025( ALL)09/95] RWARNING DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING. *[DR01027( ALL)07/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Mustang in this Owner Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses. [DR01030(MBC )05/94] The console-mounted gearshift will lock in P (Park) when you turn the key to the LOCK position. When the gearshift is in any position except P (Park), the ignition key cannot be turned to LOCK or removed from the steering column. TO REMOVE THE KEY, the gearshift lever must be in P (Park). 178 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 % [DR01200(M )03/93] half page art:0010306-D The positions of the console-mounted gearshift *[DR01500( ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desired position, release the brake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary. *[DR01700( ALL)01/95] *[DR01800( ALL)08/95] R (Reverse) *[DR01830( ALL)01/95] N (Neutral) [DR01860( ALL)10/95] As in P (Park), there is no power transferred through the transmission. However, the final drive is not locked so the wheels are free to rotate. The vehicle may be started in the N position, but the ignition key cannot be removed. % With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle will move backward. You should always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse). 179 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 % Driving [DR01945(M )05/95] Your vehicle’s gearshift is console-mounted on the floor. The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) is located on the console to the right of the gearshift handle and is marked “O/D”. The Transmission Control Indicator Light is located on the instrument panel. You can put the gearshift lever in any of the several positions. [DR01951(MBC )03/95] The OVERDRIVE OFF light is off (not illuminated) during normal vehicle operation. This allows the transmission to upshift and downshift from 1st through 4th gears. When the TCS is pressed, the Transmission Control Indicator Light will illuminate (O/D OFF) on the instrument panel. When this O/D OFF is illuminated the transmission will upshift and downshift from 1st through 3rd gears. [DR01957( ALL)11/94] If the O/D OFF light does not come “on” when the TCS is depressed or if the light “FLASHES” when you are driving, have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the transmission. [DR01965(M )06/93] To return the transmission to normal operation (1st through 4th gear) depress the TCS marked “O/D” again. This switch may be used to cancel overdrive any time the vehicle is being driven. Each time your vehicle is started, the overdrive system will automatically be in the normal overdrive mode and the light will not be illuminated. *[DR02010(MBC )05/95] *[DR02100( ALL)01/95] When to use D (Overdrive) *[DR01900( ALL)01/95] % Overdrive is the usual driving position for an automatic overdrive transmission. It works the same way Drive works, automatically upshifting or downshifting as the vehicle speeds or slows. 180 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR02200( ALL)01/95] However, Overdrive also shifts into a fourth gear —an overdrive gear — when your vehicle cruises at an appropriate consistent speed for any length of time. This fourth gear will increase your fuel economy when you travel at cruising speeds. [DR02500(MBC )05/95] When to use D (Overdrive) — with transmission control switch activated (O/D OFF light illuminated) *[DR02600(MBC )01/95] Overdrive may not be appropriate for certain terrain. If the transmission shifts back and forth between Third and Fourth gears while you are driving on hilly roads or if your vehicle does not have adequate power for climbing hills, depress the TCS. [DR02606(M )06/93] You can depress the TCS marked “OD” at any speed. *[DR02610( ALL)01/95] *[DR02620( ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second) *[DR02700( ALL)01/95] *[DR02800( ALL)03/95] When to use 1 (Low) *[DR03000( ALL)01/95] *[DR03100( ALL)01/95] P (Park) Use 2 (Second) for start-up on slippery roads or to give you more engine braking to slow your vehicle on downgrades. Use 1 (Low) when driving down steep grades. It gives more engine braking to slow your vehicle than 2 (Second) on the downgrades. You can upshift from 1 (Low) to 2 (Second) or from 1 (Low) to Overdrive at any speed. Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). This locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from rotating. 181 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR03200( ALL)06/95] RWARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park). *[DR03225( ALL)06/95] RWARNING Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running. *[DR03400(MBC )01/95] You can tell a console-mounted gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) if the lever is adjacent to the P (Park) and you cannot move it without pushing in the thumb button. *[DR06100(M )03/95] Driving with a Manual Transmission % *[DR06200(M )03/95] Using the Clutch [DR06300(M )03/95] After starting the engine with the clutch pedal pushed to the floor, allow it to idle for a few seconds. Then, hold your right foot on the brake pedal. Release the hand brake. Move the gearshift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear. [DR06400(M )03/95] To move the vehicle, pull your right foot off the brake pedal and then slowly release the clutch pedal. (You may need to press down slowly on the accelerator at the same time that you release the clutch pedal.) *[DR06500(M )03/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch life. *[DR06600(M )03/95] Driving with your foot resting on the clutch may cause the vehicle to jerk sharply when pressing or removing your other foot from the accelerator. % 182 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 % Shifting the Gears [DR06800(M )03/95] The gearshift can be in one of seven possible positions, as shown below. *[DR06700(M )03/95] [DR06950(M )03/95] one third page art:0010574-B The positions of the floor-mounted gearshift [DR07000(M )03/95] Always push the clutch pedal all the way in when you shift. You should upshift according to the speeds given in the chart in this section. *[DR07100(M )03/95] *[DR07200(M )03/95] *[DR07300(M )05/95] Backing up 1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop. [DR07400(M )03/95] 2. Push the clutch pedal in all the way to the floor. [DR07550(M )03/95] 3. Then move the gearshift all the way to the right and pull it back into R (Reverse). [DR07800(M )03/95] 4. Once R (Reverse) is engaged, slowly release the clutch pedal from the floor. [DR07900(M )03/95] If R (Reverse) is not engaged, continue to push the clutch pedal in while you put the gearshift back into Neutral. Then, release the clutch pedal for a moment and repeat steps 2 through 4. % To shift into R (Reverse): 183 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR08000(M )05/95] *[DR08100(M )03/95] Upshifting [DR08200(M )03/93] Shift Speeds for 3.8L Engine Models % Most of the time, you should upshift at the following speeds: [DR08300(M )03/91] eight pica chart:0010311-C [DR08400(M )03/95] Shift Speeds for 4.6L Engine Models [DR08500(M )03/91] eight pica chart:0010312-C [DR08800(M )03/95] * In these gears, you may sometimes shift at lower speeds than those we suggest to improve fuel economy. [DR08900(M )03/95] Sometimes, you will upshift at higher speeds. For example, you may want to stay in a lower gear to gain more power for passing or for climbing a hill. However, you must stay within the allowable tachometer range when you upshift or downshift. See Tachometer in the Index. 184 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR09000(M )05/95] *[DR09100(M )03/95] Downshifting *[DR09200(M )03/95] When you drive down steep hills, downshifting helps you keep a safe speed and helps prevent unnecessary wear on the brakes. *[DR09300(M )03/95] When you come to a stop, do not downshift through each gear. Disengage the clutch and use the brake as necessary. Downshifting through the gears decreases your vehicle’s fuel economy. [DR09400(M )03/95] NOTE: Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h). This will damage the clutch. *[DR09500(M )03/95] *[DR09600(M )03/95] Parking % *[DR09700(M )05/95] When you slow down or climb a steep hill, always downshift before the engine starts to lose power. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives your vehicle better acceleration to increase speed again. To park your vehicle, shift into 1 (First), set the parking brake fully, and turn off the ignition. RWARNING Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. % [DR09720( ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Axle (If equipped) [DR09730( ALL)12/91] This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions the Traction-Lok axle functions as a standard rear axle. 185 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR09740( ALL)03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. *[DR09750( ALL)05/95] RWARNING To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. *[DR09800( ALL)01/95] % [DR09900( ALL)01/95] * % Steering Your Vehicle Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to help steer your vehicle. % If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort. *[DR10000( ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left for more than five seconds if the engine is running. This can damage the power steering pump. *[DR10500( ALL)03/95] % [DR10600( ALL)01/95] * Brakes *[DR09950( ALL)04/95] % Applying the Brakes [DR10650( ALL)06/95] Braking non ABS models [DR10700(M )10/95] All models have power 4-wheel disc brakes (anti-lock on all four wheels is optional/standard on Cobra models). They adjust automatically as the brake pads or linings wear down. *[DR11100( ALL)05/95] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the “squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. This allows the 186 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing down, which lets you steer properly. [DR11300( ALL)03/95] On vehicles without anti-lock brakes, extreme braking can make the wheels lock and slide, possibly decreasing your control of the steering. If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the “squeeze” technique. [DR11310( ALL)05/95] Braking with ABS brakes [DR11400( ALL)03/95] On vehicles with anti-lock brakes, the wheels will not lock and slide when you press down hard on the brake pedal. The anti-lock brakes automatically start releasing and reapplying the front brakes independently and the rear brakes together whenever your wheels start to lock. Do not “pump” the brake pedal on vehicles equipped with anti-lock brakes. When this happens, you will feel the brake pedal pulse. This “pulse” may be an unfamiliar feeling but it is normal and indicates the ABS is working as designed. *[DR11650( ALL)05/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal; you will wear out the linings and increase your vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotor damage may also eventually occur. *[DR11700( ALL)09/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do not apply your brakes continuously. If you apply your brakes continuously, they may overheat and become less effective. *[DR11800( ALL)10/95] % Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does not affect the function of the brake system and is normal. However, if the squeal becomes louder or more frequent, have your brakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified service technician. 187 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 [DR11900( ALL)05/94] Ford Motor Company has not found any detrimental effects of popular mobile radio transmitting equipment installed on vehicles with the anti-lock brake system, if the equipment is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. However, if mobile radio transmitting equipment is installed in your vehicle and, if either the anti-lock brake system cycles or the check anti-lock light comes on at any time other than right after you turn the key to ON or during a sudden stop, have your mobile radio dealer inspect the installation. *[DR12000( ALL)03/95] *[DR12050( ALL)01/95] Parking Brake [DR12100(M )01/89] The brake handle is located between the front seats. [DR12600(M )03/95] To set the parking brake after parking your vehicle, apply the brake pedal with your right foot and pull up on the parking brake handle. The brake system warning light will glow. % The parking brake should be used whenever you park your vehicle. [DR13100(M )08/93] one third page art:0010314-B The parking brake 188 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR13700(M )03/95] RWARNING When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of the parking brake. Turn the key to LOCK whenever you leave your vehicle. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running. If you do not take these precautions, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone. [DR13900(M )10/95] To release the parking brake, pull the handle upward, push in the button, then lower the handle. The Brake System warning light will glow if the parking brake is not fully released when the engine is running. *[DR14200( ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light each time you start your engine. Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy. *[DR14300( ALL)01/93] RWARNING If the parking brake is fully released, but the Brake System light remains on, have the brakes checked immediately. They may not be working properly. [DR14400( ALL)07/93] The parking brake system is designed for static parking only and is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, but you can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if the normal brakes fail. However, since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected. 189 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 % *[DR14500( ALL)01/95] % [DR14600( ALL)01/95] * *[DR14700( ALL)07/95] Driving Under Special Conditions Tips for Safe Driving As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handle differently from your previous vehicle. Use care until you become accustomed to its various features and driving characteristics. *[DR14800( ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of these maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently than anticipated. *[DR15200( ALL)01/95] % [DR15300( ALL)01/95] * *[DR15400( ALL)03/95] *[DR15500( ALL)03/95] Driving in Bad Weather *[DR15600( ALL)01/95] *[DR15700( ALL)02/95] *[DR15800( ALL)01/95] *[DR15900( ALL)03/92] ❑ Drive slower than you normally would. ❑ Do not use speed control. ❑ Give your vehicle more distance to stop. ❑ Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to *[DR16000( ALL)02/93] *[DR16100(M )05/95] ❑ Consider using one of the lower gears. % Slippery roads Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads: ❑ Do not quickly move the steering wheel unless necessary. avoid locking your wheels. (Does not apply to vehicles with anti-lock brakes.) RWARNING To avoid losing control on slippery roads, do not downshift into Low with the automatic transmission when moving faster than 20 mph (32 km/h). Do not downshift into First with the manual transmission when moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). 190 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR16225( ALL)03/95] RWARNING If your vehicle has speed control, do not use it on slippery roads. You could lose control of your vehicle and could injure someone. [DR16300(MBC )03/92] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud or snow), you may try to “rock” it out of the spot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward and reverse gears. At the same time, press lightly on the accelerator. *[DR16400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. [DR16500( ALL)12/94] By moving the vehicle backward and forward, you may gain enough momentum to move out of the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. This may overheat the engine, damage the transmission, or damage the tires. If you are still stuck after a minute or two of rocking, call for a tow truck. *[DR16700( ALL)01/95] *[DR16800( ALL)01/95] High water *[DR16900( ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You may have limited traction or wet brakes, so allow extra stopping distance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual. *[DR17000( ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakes gently several times as your vehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry the brakes. % Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that the water is below the bottom of the wheel rims. 191 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 % *[DR17100( ALL)03/95] *[DR17200( ALL)01/95] Driving With a Heavy Load There are limits to the amount of weight your vehicle can carry or tow. The total weight of your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers and cargo, should never be more than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that your vehicle carries over the front axle and rear axle should never be more than the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective axle. % [DR17300( ALL)05/94] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the left front door lock facing or the door latch post pillar. *[DR17400( ALL)08/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of replacement tires with higher weight limits than originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR. Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWR and GAWR limitations. *[DR17500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged or you may lose control and injure someone. *[DR17503( ALL)01/95] *[DR17506( ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load *[DR17509( ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add the weights of: *[DR17512( ALL)01/95] ❑ the driver and passengers % The load that you add to your vehicle must not exceed the maximum load stated on the Safety Compliance Certification Decal attached to the left front door pillar. 192 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR17515( ALL)01/95] ❑ luggage and any other items that you put in *[DR17518( ALL)01/95] *[DR17521( ALL)01/95] ❑ the tongue load of the loaded trailer ❑ the weight of any equipment that has been *[DR17524( ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of these items, use the following procedure to figure the weight of a load: *[DR17527( ALL)01/95] 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver, passengers and luggage. You might take your vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks. *[DR17530( ALL)01/95] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver, passengers and luggage. *[DR17533( ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second to figure the total weight of the load. *[DR17536( ALL)01/95] After determining this load, you must also make sure that the total weight of your vehicle, plus the load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also, make sure that the weight your vehicle carries over each axle is less than the GAWR for the respective axle. *[DR17539( ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load or remove cargo accordingly. *[DR17542( ALL)05/95] RWARNING your vehicle added to your vehicle since it was delivered to your dealer Improper distribution of your vehicle’s load or carrying weight in excess of the amount shown on the tire decal can cause rapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control. 193 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 % *[DR17550(MBC )04/95] *[DR17650( ALL)01/95] Trailer Towing Your vehicle does not come from the factory fully equipped to tow. No towing packages are available through Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealers. *[DR17700( ALL)01/95] Because towing a trailer puts extra strain on your vehicle, you must follow certain precautions for your safety and the good of your vehicle: *[DR17800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Stay within the load limits for towing your *[DR17900( ALL)01/95] ❑ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your *[DR18000( ALL)01/95] ❑ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle *[DR18100( ALL)01/95] ❑ Service your vehicle more frequently if you *[DR18175( ALL)01/95] Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight should be on the tongue. However, the tongue load should never exceed 10% of the maximum weight that your vehicle can safely tow. *[DR18250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING vehicle. (See Trailer towing specifications in this chapter.) vehicle for towing, making sure to use the right equipment and to attach it properly. (See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.) while you tow. (See Driving while you tow in this chapter.) tow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if you tow in this chapter.) Do not tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is being used. [DR18300( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing vehicle. The amount of weight that you can safely tow depends on the optional equipment on your vehicle. See the following chart. 194 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 % [DR18400( ALL)03/90] Trailer towing specifications [DR18450(M )03/95] six pica chart:0010320-C *[DR20900( ALL)01/95] *[DR21000( ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow *[DR21100( ALL)01/95] Do not use hitches that clamp onto your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed to bear the load. *[DR21125( ALL)01/95] Always check the pressure in all your vehicle’s tires when preparing to tow (see inflation recommendation on the tire label). *[DR21150( ALL)01/95] *[DR21200(MBC )01/95] Using the hitch *[DR21600( ALL)01/95] Tie down the load so that it does not shift and change the weight on the hitch. This will prevent damage to your vehicle and make your vehicle easier to handle. % For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. If you are not certain that you are using the right equipment in the proper manner, see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Your vehicle uses a load carrying hitch. Because this type of hitch places the tongue load of a trailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle, you must distribute the load in your trailer so that only 10 to 15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. 195 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR21650( ALL)01/95] *[DR21700( ALL)01/95] Connecting the safety chains *[DR21800( ALL)01/95] *[DR21900( ALL)01/95] To connect the trailer’s safety chains: 1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and attach them to your vehicle’s frame or hook retainers. Never attach the safety chains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed to bear the weight of a trailer. *[DR22000( ALL)01/95] 2. Make sure that you leave enough slack in the chains to allow you to turn corners. *[DR22100( ALL)01/95] If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency gives you. *[DR22150( ALL)01/95] *[DR22200( ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s brakes [DR22250( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional trailer tow package, provisions have been made under the instrument panel for installation of an electronic brake controller. % % Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to your vehicle. They help protect your trailer if the hitch breaks. Electric brakes and manual, automatic, or surge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure that your trailer’s brakes meet local and federal regulations. *[DR22300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. 196 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 *[DR22350( ALL)01/95] *[DR22400( ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s lights [DR22450( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional trailer tow package, the proper lamp wiring and equipment has been installed at the factory. The trailer feed wire (supplied in a box in the luggage compartment) needs a connector compatible with your trailer prior to installation. *[DR22500( ALL)01/95] If you do not install trailer lights correctly, you may cause damage to the vehicle’s lighting system. *[DR22600( ALL)01/95] *[DR22650( ALL)05/95] Driving While You Tow [DR22950(MBC )09/93] If you tow in Overdrive while riding through hilly country, your vehicle may frequently shift between Overdrive and Third gears. To prevent your vehicle from shifting too much, depress the Transmission Control Switch (TCS). This will also give the engine more power going up hills and better engine braking going down hills. % % Do not connect a trailer’s lighting system wiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting system wiring. To get the proper equipment for hooking up your trailer’s lights, see your local trailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure to follow their instructions carefully. Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can brake gradually. 197 File:10rcdrm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:33:56 1996 [DR22955(M )05/95] If your vehicle has a manual transmission and you are towing a trailer, you should select gear positions which will avoid jerking or excessive engine speed. If you need to drive excessively in 1 (First) or 2 (Second), it may indicate that the trailer is too big or heavily loaded for your vehicle’s drivetrain. Continuous driving in these two gears while towing a trailer is not recommended. [DR22960(M )08/93] When you tow up or down steep hills, move the manual transmission gearshift to a lower gear. This will increase engine power on upgrades and engine braking on downgrades. % If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long, steep grades, the speed control may shut off. *[DR23100( ALL)08/95] *[DR23200( ALL)08/93] Servicing Your Vehicle If You Tow *[DR23000( ALL)01/95] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will need to be serviced more frequently than usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additional information. 198 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 Roadside Emergencies % *[RE00400( ALL)03/95] *[RE00450( ALL)08/95] *[RE00500( ALL)02/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the lights on or any electrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If this happens, you may be able to jump-start your vehicle with a booster battery. RWARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. *[RE00600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING To protect yourself when charging a battery, always shield your face and eyes. Make sure that you can breathe fresh air. *[RE00700( ALL)06/95] % RWARNING Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners. *[RE00800( ALL)07/95] % RWARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes, and clothing. *[RE00900( ALL)07/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing, immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the 199 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately. *[RE01000( ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery, and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these directions for preparing your vehicle to jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in the order they are given. If in doubt, call for road service. *[RE01100( ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle [RE01150( ALL)11/90] NOTE: also see label on battery. *[RE01200( ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need to use a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if you connect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt generator set). *[RE01300( ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. *[RE01400( ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. *[RE01500( ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the jumper cables. *[RE01600( ALL)02/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Turning on the fan helps protect the electrical system from voltage surges. Turn off all other switches and lights in both vehicles to prevent possible damage to either vehicle’s electrical systems. 200 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 *[RE01700( ALL)05/95] *[RE01800( ALL)03/95] Connecting the jumper cables 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect either jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you use the same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable is generally used for the positive terminals and the black for the negative ones. *[RE01900( ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. *[RE02000( ALL)07/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (S) terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the discharged battery. [RE02100( ALL)01/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to a good metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle making sure it is clear of any rotating engine components. The following illustrations show where you can find a metallic surface. % *[RE02200( ALL)07/95] RWARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (S) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 201 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 [RE02300(M )10/95] full page art:0010332-E The 3.8L SFI engine 202 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 [RE02650(MBC )05/95] full page art:0010666-G The 4.6L SFI Engine 203 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 *[RE02900( ALL)03/95] *[RE03000( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way of moving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a moderate speed. *[RE03100( ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and then start the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries before the vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after several attempts, there may be a different problem. *[RE03200( ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a few minutes to charge the discharged battery. *[RE03300( ALL)03/95] *[RE03400( ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the reverse order. Remove the negative (S) end of the jumper cable from the metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. *[RE03500( ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the negative (S) cable from the booster battery. *[RE03600( ALL)06/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery. *[RE03700( ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from the discharged battery. *[RE03800( ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions. Drive it around for a while with all electrical accessories turned off to let the battery recharge. You may need to use a battery charger to fully recharge the battery. % 204 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 [RE03810(M )09/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 3.8L engine you will need to perform additional steps after your vehicle has been jump started. See Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing in Servicing Your Vehicle Chapter. *[RE03900( ALL)03/95] *[RE04000( ALL)01/95] Changing a Tire % If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers. % The Temporary Spare Tire [RE04225(MBC )03/94] You have a high pressure temporary spare tire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergency use only. Use it only when you get a flat tire and replace it as soon as you can. This spare tire is marked with the words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you can easily identify it. *[RE04250( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Extended use of other than conventional spare tires on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver. *[RE04300( ALL)01/93] RWARNING *[RE04100( ALL)03/95] If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do not follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causing you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuring yourself or others. 205 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 *[RE04400( ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT: *[RE04500( ALL)01/95] ❑ exceed 50 *[RE04600( ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than *[RE04700( ALL)01/95] *[RE04800( ALL)01/95] *[RE04900( ALL)01/95] ❑ tow a trailer. ❑ use tire chains on this tire. ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire or *[RE05000( ALL)01/95] *[RE05100( ALL)01/95] ❑ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle. ❑ drive through an automatic car wash with mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances. the maximum vehicle load rating listed on the tire decal. remove it from its wheel. this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get caught in the rails and it could be damaged. % Spare Tire Location [RE05600( ALL)11/90] The spare is stored in the trunk. *[RE05500( ALL)03/95] 206 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 [RE05800(M )11/93] half page art:0010338-C The spare tire location % To remove the spare tire: [RE06520(M )06/93] 1. Remove the optional cargo net and storage bag. [RE06530(M )05/90] 2. Remove the spare tire cover. [RE06540(M )05/90] 3. Unscrew the wing-nut holding down the spare tire. *[RE06560(M )01/89] % [RE07300( ALL)03/95] * 4. Lift out the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench. [RE07500(M )03/95] 1. *[RE06500( ALL)02/95] Preparing to Change the Tire Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. If you have an automatic transmission, put the gearshift in P (Park). If you have a manual transmission, put the gearshift in 1 (First). Set the parking brake and block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire that you are changing. 207 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 *[RE07535(M )05/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) or 1 (First). To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block the wheel (both directions) that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire that is being changed. *[RE07560( ALL)09/95] RWARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. *[RE07875( ALL)05/95] RWARNING To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off the ground, such as when changing a tire. *[RE07900( ALL)03/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack. [RE08010(M )03/95] 3. Remove wheel covers with the tapered end of a wheel nut wrench. Insert the handle of the wrench and twist it against the inner wheel cover flange. To remove aluminum wheel center ornaments, insert the curled end of lug wrench into pry-off notch and pry against the wheel. To avoid damage to aluminum wheel, do not twist wrench. For more about removing wheel covers, see the information later in this section. *[RE08100(MBC )09/95] 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until the tire is raised off the ground. You should pull up on the handle rather than push to develop maximum force to loosen wheel lug nuts. See Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts later in this chapter for information on removing anti-theft lug nuts. 208 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 *[RE08150( ALL)05/95] % [RE08200(M )11/94] * % *[RE08400( ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire 1. Find the jack notch next to the door of the tire that you are changing. Put the jack in the jack notch and turn the handle of the jack clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. RWARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire. % [RE08500(M )03/93] half page art:0010345-B The notches for the jack 209 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 [RE08550( ALL)10/92] half page art:0010759-A The improper lift point [RE08570( ALL)05/92] NOTE: Never use the differential housing as a lift point. *[RE08900( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel clears the ground. Remove the wheel lug nuts. *[RE08920( ALL)01/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure that the air valve stem is facing outward. *[RE08940( ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until the wheel is snug against the hub. The beveled edges on the lug nuts face inward. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower the vehicle. If you do, you could force the vehicle off the jack. *[RE08960( ALL)01/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 210 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 *[RE08980( ALL)01/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown in the following illustration. As soon as possible, have your dealer or a qualified service technician check the lug nuts for proper torque specifications. % [RE09100( ALL)03/93] quarter page art:0010350-A The lug nuts on the wheel *[RE09400( ALL)01/95] 7. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in the trunk. *[RE09500( ALL)03/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Make sure the jack is securely fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. *[RE09600( ALL)06/95] 9. Unblock the wheels. % [RE10600(MBC )12/94] Aluminum Road Wheel Ornaments (If equipped) [RE10700(MBC )03/93] To remove the ornament, stick the tapered end of the jack handle between the ornament and wheel and pry off the ornament. [RE10800(MBC )03/93] To replace the ornament, stick one side of the ornament into the center of the wheel and strike the other side with the palm of your hand. [RE11838(M GV)03/93] Remove the wheelcover from the wheel using the flanged end of the wheel nut wrench by inserting the handle and then prying against the inner wheelcover flange. [RE11842(M GV)10/95] Install the wheelcover on the wheel with the valve stem in the wheel matching the hole in the wheelcover. Push by hand on the outside edges 211 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 of the wheelcover until it is snapped firmly in place on the wheel. % Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped) [RE12801(M )10/95] The aluminum wheels on Mustang 4.6L engine vehicles are secured with locking lug nuts. One of the lug nuts on each wheel must be removed and installed with a special key. The key and a registration card are attached to the lug wrench and stored with the spare tire. If you lose the key, send the registration card to the manufacturer (not to the dealer) to get a replacement key. *[RE12850(MBC )03/95] NOTE: If entire lug wrench/lug nut key assembly is lost, see your nearest Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer who has access to a master set of keys. *[RE12875(MBC )09/95] NOTE: DO NOT USE A POWER IMPACT WRENCH ON THE LUG NUT KEY. *[RE12700(MBC )03/95] [RE13000(MBC )03/95] quarter page art:0010357-B The anti-theft lug nut and key *[RE13100(MBC )03/95] *[RE13300(MBC )03/95] Removing the anti-theft lug nut *[RE13400(MBC )03/95] Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and apply pressure on the key with the wrench. Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise direction to remove the lug nut. Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Make sure that you hold the key square to the lug nut. If you hold the key on an angle, you may damage the key and the lug nut. 212 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 *[RE13500(MBC )09/95] *[RE13600(MBC )03/95] Reinstalling the anti-theft lug nut *[RE13800( ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks But Does Not Start or Does Not Start After a Collision [RE13810( ALL)07/95] The Fuel System Shut-off Switch [RE13900( ALL)07/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a collision, the fuel system shut-off switch may have been triggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuel system when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt. [RE14000( ALL)07/95] For information on how to check and reset the fuel system shut-off switch, see Fuel system shut-off switch in the Index. Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut key and, while applying pressure on the key, install the lug nut. % Towing Your Vehicle [RE14225(M )10/95] Mustang/Mustang GT [RE14250(M )10/95] It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with wheel lift or flatbed equipment. If slingbelt equipment must be used, the towbar will deform the soft fascia (bumper). However, it will return to an acceptable shape. [RE14255(M )10/95] Mustang Cobra/Convertible [RE14260(M )10/95] DO NOT TOW WITH SLINGBELT EQUIPMENT. Ford Motor Company has not developed or approved a T-hook sling-type procedure. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment. If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, the front wheels must be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the front fascia (bumper). *[RE14100( ALL)05/95] 213 File:12rcrem.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:34:49 1996 [RE14350(M )10/95] three fourths page art:0011387-A *[RE14400( ALL)03/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind of vehicle you have. A towing manual is available from Ford Motor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck driver refer to this manual for the proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. 214 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 Customer Assistance % *[HS00205( ALL)06/94] *[HS00210( ALL)08/95] Roadside Assistance Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators who put you in touch with the help you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle. This complimentary service is provided to you throughout your warranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside Assistance coverages beyond this period (available through Ford Auto Club in the United States or Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. *[HS00215( ALL)06/94] *[HS00220( ALL)06/94] *[HS00225( ALL)06/94] *[HS00230( ALL)06/94] *[HS00235( ALL)06/94] *[HS00240( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following: *[HS00245( ALL)06/94] *[HS00250( ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance ❑ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire. ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead. ❑ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out. ❑ Bring you fuel if you run out. ❑ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing and repossession). Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Complete the card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. 215 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 *[HS00255( ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). *[HS00260( ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006). *[HS00300( ALL)01/95] *[HS00400( ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how to get service or maintenance for your vehicle. % Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada) *[HS00600( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may, however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be able to resolve your concern. *[HS00700( ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service you received from your dealership’s service department, talk to the service manager at the dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to the owner or general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you will have your concern resolved at this level. *[HS01000( ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to be serviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership that may be able to help. *[HS00500( ALL)02/95] 216 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 *[HS01025( ALL)04/95] % [HS01050( ALL)03/95] * In the U.S., contact: one inch art:0060100-E *[HS01100( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. *[HS01150( ALL)04/95] % one inch art:0060101-C *[HS01200( ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available when contacting Ford Customer Assistance: *[HS01300( ALL)04/95] ❑ your telephone number (both business and *[HS01400( ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where the *[HS01500( ALL)03/95] *[HS01550( ALL)03/95] *[HS01600( ALL)03/95] % [HS01700( ALL)09/95] * ❑ the year and make of your vehicle ❑ the date purchased ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle ❑ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) home) dealership is located listed on your owner card and/or your vehicle ownership license 217 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 [HS01800( ALL)05/95] one inch art:0010630-A Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number) *[HS02200( ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada. % The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only) *[HS02400( ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary, independent dispute-settlement program available free to owners or lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles. *[HS02500( ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without incurring obligations. *[HS02600( ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board Review? *[HS02700( ALL)08/95] The Board reviews unresolved warranty performance complaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks under warranty that have not been resolved by a dealer or Ford Motor Company. *[HS02750( ALL)03/95] *[HS02800( ALL)01/95] *[HS02900( ALL)01/95] The Board does not review issues involving: *[HS02300( ALL)02/95] ❑ A non-Ford product ❑ A non-Ford dealership 218 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 *[HS03100( ALL)01/95] *[HS03200( ALL)01/95] ❑ A vehicle sales transaction ❑ A request for reimbursement of consequential *[HS03300( ALL)01/95] *[HS03400( ALL)01/95] *[HS03450( ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty ❑ Alleged liability claims ❑ Property damage where such damage is *[HS03500( ALL)01/95] *[HS03600( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cases currently in litigation ❑ Vehicles not used primarily for personal, *[HS03650( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on which applicable express written new vehicle warranties have expired at receipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochure for California purchasers/lessees. *[HS03700( ALL)04/95] *[HS03800( ALL)04/95] *[HS03900( ALL)04/95] *[HS04000( ALL)04/95] *[HS04200( ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work? *[HS04300( ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warranty start date), you have a right to make an oral presentation before the Board by indicating your choice on the application. Also, oral expenses unless incidental to a service or product complaint being reviewed significant when compared to the economic loss alleged under the warranty dispute family, or household purposes The Board has four members: ❑ three consumer representatives ❑ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of their business leadership qualities. 219 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 presentations may be requested by the Board. A decision is made by the Board by simple majority vote. *[HS04320( ALL)04/95] Board members review all the materials related to each complaint and, based on the available information, arrive at a fair and impartial decision. Decisions are based on the written statements and any oral presentations made by each of the involved parties. *[HS04400( ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some cases will take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board will make every effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it receives the customer application form. *[HS04500( ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board will mail you its decision in writing. It will also provide you with a form to indicate your acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, but customers may have other options available to them under state or federal law. *[HS04600( ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be introduced into evidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that may be initiated. *[HS04700( ALL)01/95] *[HS04800( ALL)04/95] How Do You Contact the Board? Write to the Board at the following address to request a brochure/application. You will be sent a brochure and a one-page customer application form. The form should be completed and mailed to the same address. 220 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 *[HS04900( ALL)02/93] one inch art:0060102-B *[HS05100( ALL)04/95] *[HS05200( ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process? *[HS05300( ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs the following information: *[HS05400( ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents and *[HS05500( ALL)08/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicle *[HS05600( ALL)04/95] *[HS05700( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the time *[HS05800( ALL)04/95] *[HS05900( ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you the *[HS06000( ALL)04/95] ❑ a brief description of your unresolved *[HS06100( ALL)05/95] ❑ a brief summary of actions that were taken Your application will be reviewed and if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating the file number assigned to your application and the local Board address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford Motor Company representative are asked to submit statements. maintenance or repair orders that relate to the case identification number (VIN) of repair vehicle or who serviced your vehicle complaint with the dealer and Ford Motor Company 221 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 *[HS06200( ALL)05/95] ❑ the names *[HS06300( ALL)04/95] ❑ a description of the action you want done to *[HS06305( ALL)07/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review, an explanation will be mailed to you. % Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) *[HS07500( ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. *[HS07600( ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. *[HS07700( ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. *[HS07400( ALL)04/95] (if known) of all people you contacted at the dealership resolve your concern. 222 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 % Ford of Canada Customer Assistance *[HS08800( ALL)08/95] *[HS08900( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited *[HS08700( ALL)05/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance Centre. *[HS09000( ALL)03/95] one inch art:0060101-C % Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only) *[HS09200( ALL)09/95] In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). *[HS09300( ALL)10/95] The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. *[HS09400( ALL)09/95] In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party Arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal enviroment. These impartial Arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, where appropriate, render awards to resolve *[HS09100( ALL)09/95] 223 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair and final as the Arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Cananda. *[HS09500( ALL)09/95] CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces, except Quebec. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. % Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada *[HS09800( ALL)06/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure local regulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle. Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether you should import your vehicle to that country. *[HS09900( ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle needs, contact a district or owner relations office before you leave the U.S. or Canada. *[HS10000( ALL)06/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emissions control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company is not responsible for any damage that is caused by use of improper fuel. *[HS10100( ALL)06/95] You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel. *[HS09700( ALL)06/95] 224 File:13rchsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:14 1996 *[HS10200( ALL)06/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write to: *[HS10300( ALL)06/95] one inch art:0095024-A *[HS10400( ALL)06/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can direct you to the appropriate Ford affiliate office. *[HS10500( ALL)06/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your Vehicle Identification Number and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations. 225 File:14rcacm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996 Accessories *[AC00200( ALL)03/95] *[AC00240( ALL)04/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle Ford has many fine products available from your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use the following, or products of equivalent quality: *[AC00280( ALL)05/95] twelve pica chart:0001433-A *[AC00300( ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is available through your local authorized dealer. These fine accessories have been engineered specifically to fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications. That is why Ford brand accessories are warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your dealer for complete warranty information and accessory availability. 227 File:14rcacm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996 *[AC00350( ALL)06/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience [AC00400(M )03/95] sixteen pica chart:0010548-P [AC00500(M )03/95] eighteen pica chart:0010549-J 228 File:14rcacm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996 [AC00910(M )05/94] NOTE: Use only hook and pad design roof racks. Follow all manufacturers recommendations including vehicle speed, rack loads and tie down procedures. Also, DO NOT over torque the hook clamp, as vehicle damage may occur. *[AC01400( ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. [AC01500( ALL)09/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or in Canada the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulates the use of mobile communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones, and theft alarms — that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC regulation and should be installed only by a qualified technician. 229 File:14rcacm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996 *[AC01600( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. For example, when operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. In addition, such systems may themselves be damaged or their operation affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers, and other transmitters whose power output is 5 watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) *[AC01700( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over the installation, design, or manufacture of such systems, Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result if you use this equipment. 230 File:14rcacm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996 % [AC01800(M )12/94] thirty-six pica chart:0011320-A 232 File:14rcacm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996 [AC01900(M )12/94] thirty-six pica chart:0011321-A 233 File:14rcacm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:35:46 1996 [AC02000(M )12/94] thirty-six pica chart:0011322-A 234 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 Servicing Your Mustang % Service Made Easy *[SV00300( ALL)03/95] *[SV00400( ALL)01/95] *[SV00550( ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle. 1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to be serviced. *[SV00600( ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible. To help you: *[SV00700( ALL)01/95] ❑ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in *[SV00800( ALL)01/95] ❑ When possible, we design parts — such as *[SV00900( ALL)05/94] ❑ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that *[SV01000( ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need to check and service regularly. *[SV01100( ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your dealership can provide the parts and service required. Check your Warranty Information Booklet to find out which parts and services are covered. Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner Guide. *[SV01250( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that the Owner Maintenance Checks listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet be performed for the proper operation of your the engine compartment so that you can find them easily. the headlamp bulbs — that can be replaced without tools. makes tracking routine service for your vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. 235 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that your vehicle may need service. If you do notice something unusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly. *[SV01275( ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids, and service parts conforming to Ford specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Using these parts for replacement is your assurance that Ford-built quality stays in your vehicle. *[SV01400( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. % *[SV01600( ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle *[SV01700( ALL)06/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle. Here are some general precautions for your safety: % *[SV01800(MBC )10/95] % ❑ Do not work on a hot engine. The engine cooling fan may come on unexpectedly. Always turn the engine off and let it cool. *[SV01850(MBC )10/95] RWARNING The cooling fan is automatic and may come on at any time. Always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before working near the fan. 236 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV01900( ALL)06/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running, *[SV02000( ALL)06/95] ❑ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed *[SV02100( ALL)08/95] ❑ Never get under a vehicle while it is *[SV02200( ALL)06/95] ❑ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking *[SV02600(MBC )03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To find out how the engine does this, see Battery in this chapter. *[SV02800( ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off: [SV02900(M )03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully, block the wheels, and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). *[SV03100( ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after you turn the engine off. *[SV03150( ALL)06/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. *[SV03200( ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on: [SV03300(M )03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully, and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or Neutral (manual transmission). *[SV03501( ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from moving unexpectedly. avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in moving parts. Take appropriate precautions with long hair. space with the engine running, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. supported only by a jack. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands. materials away from the battery and all fuel-related parts. 237 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV03600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. % Opening the Hood [SV03800( ALL)03/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release located under the lower left corner of the instrument panel. [SV04000( ALL)03/95] 2. Go around to the front of the vehicle, and release the auxiliary catch that is located under the front edge of the hood at the center of the vehicle. *[SV03650( ALL)03/95] [SV04085(M )05/95] one third page art:0011350-A The auxiliary catch under the front edge of the hood [SV04100(M )01/89] 3. [SV04300(M )01/89] Whenever you close the hood, make sure the prop rod is secured in its retainer and that the hood latches securely. *[SV04450( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch at six-month intervals to maintain smooth and trouble-free operation. 238 Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod using only the hole marked “PROP”. File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 % *[SV04600( ALL)04/95] *[SV04700(MBC )09/93] [SV04900(MBC )06/95] [SV05075(MBC )03/95] *[SV05300(MBC )11/94] Engine Compartment Your vehicle has one of these types of engines: ❑ a 3.8 liter SFI engine ❑ a 4.6 liter SFI engine The following pages show diagrams of each engine type and where to find items that you should regularly service. 239 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV05400(M )10/95] full page art:0010325-D A 3.8 Liter SFI engine 240 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV05500(M )05/95] full page art:0011343-A A 4.6 Liter (2V) engine — GT models 241 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV05850( ALL)04/95] *[SV06000( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine *[SV06020( ALL)07/95] ❑ Extreme care must be used if a power washer *[SV06040( ALL)08/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of the *[SV06060( ALL)07/95] ❑ The alternator, distributor and air intake must *[SV06080( ALL)04/95] ❑ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is *[SV06100( ALL)03/95] *[SV06240(MBC )05/95] Filling the Fuel Tank % % *[SV06550( ALL)05/95] A clean engine is more efficient because a buildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than usual. is used to clean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetrate sealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions. engine block or fuel injection pump, do not spray a hot engine or injection pump with cold water. be covered. Covering these components will help prevent water damage. running. Water getting into the engine may cause internal damage. The fuel door is outside the car on the passenger side near the back. To fill the fuel tank: 1. After opening the fuel filler door, remove the cap carefully and slowly by turning it counterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn. *[SV06650( ALL)05/95] RWARNING The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound while disengaging the fuel cap, wait until it stops before completely removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. 242 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV06700( ALL)05/95] 2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel filler pipe before pumping the fuel. *[SV06800( ALL)09/95] NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body of your vehicle, clean it off immediately. The fuel may dull or soften the paint if you do not wash it off. % 3. Replace the fuel cap completely when you are finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn until it is tight. It will click when it is fully tightened. *[SV06875( ALL)10/95] 4. Push the fuel door closed. *[SV06850( ALL)08/95] [SV06900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with a Motorcraft or equivalent fuel cap. If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in the fuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to work improperly in a collision, endangering you and your passengers. *[SV06950( ALL)09/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system. *[SV07500( ALL)06/95] *[SV07600( ALL)06/95] Choosing the Right Fuel *[SV07701( ALL)05/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehicle more responsive and maintain its good fuel economy and emissions. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel. % Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle. Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law. Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle is damaged because you used the wrong fuel. 243 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV08750( ALL)08/95] *[SV08800( ALL)05/95] % Octane recommendations Your engine is designed to use fuel with an octane rating of 87. In most cases it is not necessary to use a fuel with an octane rating higher than 87. At service stations, the octane rating is displayed in a label on the pumps. [SV08900( ALL)05/95] one inch art:0060001-C *[SV09100( ALL)08/95] *[SV09200( ALL)05/95] *[SV09350( ALL)05/95] *[SV09800( ALL)04/95] *[SV09900( ALL)06/95] % Using a fuel with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. However, see your dealer or a qualified service technician if persistent heavy knocking occurs because this can damage the engine. If your vehicle has problems with starting, rough idle or hesitation problems when the engine is cold, it may be caused by fuel with low volatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If the condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Gasolines for clean air Fuels in certain areas of the country are required to contain oxygenates to improve air quality. Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol (blended at no more than 10%), methanol or wood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% with cosolvents and additives), and MTBE or methyl tertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than 15%). 244 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV09950( ALL)02/95] Reformulated gasoline is also required in certain areas of the U.S. These fuels are designed to further reduce emissions from your vehicle. *[SV10000( ALL)06/95] Generally, you should not experience difficulties operating your vehicle on fuels containing oxygenates. We encourage you to use these fuels. *[SV10185( ALL)06/95] % [SV10195( ALL)05/95] Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels RWARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. To minimize the risk that you will be injured, please read the following information carefully and observe the recommended precautions. *[SV10197( ALL)07/95] *[SV10199( ALL)07/95] ❑ Turn vehicle off when refueling ❑ Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels are *[SV10201( ALL)07/95] *[SV10205( ALL)07/95] ❑ Do not siphon any fuel by mouth. extremely flammable. RWARNING Gasoline or gasoline blended with methanol can cause blindness and possible death when swallowed. If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison control center immediately. *[SV10209( ALL)07/95] *[SV10211( ALL)07/95] ❑ Avoid breathing vapors while refueling. ❑ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash with *[SV10225( ALL)07/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact soap and water. lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes, and seek medical attention. 245 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV10227( ALL)08/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratory animals. *[SV10230( ALL)08/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism, vapor or skin contact with a gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness could result. Consult a physician promptly if you experience an adverse reaction. *[SV11300( ALL)05/95] *[SV11350( ALL)09/95] Running Out of Fuel *[SV11500( ALL)07/95] You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine. [SV11600( ALL)05/95] Calculating Fuel Economy *[SV11700( ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicle, and can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers (L/100K). *[SV11750( ALL)05/95] Do not calculate fuel economy during your vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle will normally use. *[SV11800( ALL)05/95] *[SV11900( ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy: 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading. *[SV12000( ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel, record the amount (in gallons or liters) purchased. % NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on modern powertrain components. 246 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV12100( ALL)05/95] 3. After at least 3-5 tankfuls, fill the fuel tank and record the final odometer reading. *[SV12200( ALL)10/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel economy: *[SV12250( ALL)10/95] ❑ English: MPG = (total miles driven) V *[SV12275( ALL)10/95] ❑ Metric: L/100k = (liters used) V *[SV12300( ALL)05/95] *[SV12400( ALL)05/95] Comparisons With EPA Estimates *[SV12650( ALL)05/95] *[SV12700( ALL)05/95] *[SV12800( ALL)05/95] *[SV12850( ALL)05/95] *[SV12900( ALL)05/95] *[SV12950( ALL)05/95] *[SV13000( ALL)05/95] *[SV13100( ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy: *[SV13200( ALL)05/95] *[SV13300( ALL)05/95] *[SV13400( ALL)05/95] ❑ Underinflated tires ❑ Heavy loads ❑ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or (gallons used) (100 kilometers) EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory tests under simulated road conditions and may not reflect the actual conditions you experience or your style of driving. The EPA fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achieve the fuel economy shown. ❑ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance ❑ Rapid acceleration and excessive speed ❑ Driving with your foot on the brake ❑ Sudden stops ❑ Extended engine idling ❑ Using speed control in hilly terrain ❑ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defroster and other accessories luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc. 247 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV13510( ALL)02/95] *[SV13520( ALL)01/95] Self-Service Pointers *[SV13530( ALL)01/95] The following procedures require only a tire gauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshield washer fluid. *[SV13540( ALL)01/95] *[SV13550( ALL)01/95] ❑ Check the engine oil at every refueling stop ❑ Clean the windshield, outside mirrors and *[SV13560( ALL)01/95] *[SV13570( ALL)02/95] *[SV13580( ALL)01/95] %*[SV13600( ALL)02/95] *[SV13610( ALL)09/95] ❑ Check windshield washer fluid ❑ Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges ❑ Check the tire pressure at least monthly Engine Oil Recommendations If you choose to do your own fueling, you should also perform a few simple maintenance routines. This extra effort will save you additional money and contribute to the driving efficiency of your vehicle. headlights We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification WSS-M2C153-F and displaying the American Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on the front of the container. *[SV13650( ALL)03/95] one third page art:0060021-E The API Certification Mark 248 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV13670( ALL)01/95] *[SV13680( ALL)01/95] *[SV13690( ALL)04/95] % [SV13700( ALL)01/95] * Never use: ❑ “Non-Detergent” oils ❑ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG ❑ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments *[SV13702( ALL)03/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fuel economy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F (-25˚C). % *[SV13703( ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferred viscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be changed according to the maintenance schedule. *[SV13775( ALL)01/95] *[SV13800( ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil *[SV13900( ALL)04/95] *[SV14000( ALL)02/95] Checking the engine oil level: 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a few minutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan. *[SV14050(M )03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). *[SV14100( ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. *[SV14200( ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) and carefully pull it out of the engine. % % % Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safe engine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time you put fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on level ground. 249 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV14300( ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, making sure it is fully seated. [SV14355(M )10/95] one inch art:0011386-A Engine oil dipstick — 4.6 liter engines [SV14450(MBC )03/95] one inch art:0000970-A Engine oil dipstick — 3.8 liter engines *[SV14500( ALL)10/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line (3.8L) or at the “MIN” mark (4.6L), add engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is beyond the letter “F” in Full (3.8L) or “MAX” (4.6L) mark, engine damage or high oil consumption may occur and some oil must be removed from the engine. *[SV14600( ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated. 250 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV14800( ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if engine damage is caused by the use of improper engine oil. *[SV15000( ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil. *[SV16300( ALL)06/95] *[SV16400( ALL)04/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter % Change the engine oil and oil filter per the following, whichever occurs first. *[SV16500( ALL)04/95] one third page art:0060618-C *[SV16800( ALL)06/95] *[SV16900( ALL)09/95] % Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additional information. NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. 251 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV17275( ALL)07/95] RWARNING Continuous contact with USED motor oil has caused cancer in laboratory mice. *[SV17285( ALL)07/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap and water. % Engine Coolant *[SV17300( ALL)03/95] % [SV17400( ALL)09/95] * *[SV17500( ALL)09/95] Checking the Engine Coolant NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter. *[SV17550(M )10/95] RWARNING The cooling fan is automatic and may come on at any time. Always disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before working near the fan. % Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine from overheating in the summer and from freezing in the winter. Check the level of the coolant at least once a month. Simply look at the engine coolant reservoir located in the engine compartment. To locate the reservoir, see the diagram of your vehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in this chapter. *[SV17850( ALL)05/95] The coolant additives also protect the entire cooling system from internal passageway corrosion and these additives lubricate the water pump. The coolant should be serviced as noted in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. *[SV17800( ALL)05/94] 252 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV17900(M )05/95] half page art:0010371-B The engine coolant recovery reservoir — 3.8L [SV18100(M )10/95] half page art:0010761-C The engine coolant recovery reservoir — 4.6L engines 253 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV18600( ALL)08/95] *[SV18700( ALL)11/94] Checking Hoses *[SV18800( ALL)09/95] *[SV18900( ALL)09/95] Adding Engine Coolant % Inspect all engine and heater system hoses and hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and loose hose clamps as specified in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet. Repair or replace with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary. RWARNING Do not put engine coolant in the container for the windshield washer fluid. *[SV18950( ALL)09/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or antifreeze could make it difficult to see through the windshield. [SV19000(MBC )05/95] RWARNING Never remove the radiator cap or vent plug while the engine is running or hot. [SV19030( ALL)05/95] Follow these steps to avoid personal injury that can be caused by escaping steam or engine coolant. [SV19040(MBC )03/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. Even when the engine is cool, be careful when you remove the radiator cap or vent plug. [SV19145( ALL)03/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick towel around the cap and turn it slowly counterclockwise to unscrew. *[SV19150( ALL)09/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases. [SV19160( ALL)12/94] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to press the cap down, turn it, and remove it. 254 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV19170(MBC )09/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hot steam may blow out or hot engine coolant may even splash out. *[SV19190( ALL)09/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixture your vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refill capacities for fluids in the Index. % [SV19200( ALL)06/95] Add engine coolant only to the reservoir. If the coolant level is low, add a 50/50 or appropriate mixture of water and the type of engine coolant that Ford specifies. You may add water by itself only in an emergency, but you should replace it with a 50/50 or appropriate mixture as soon as possible. *[SV19300( ALL)01/95] Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if you have to add more than a quart (liter) of engine coolant more than once a month. *[SV19350( ALL)09/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an optimized formula that will protect all metals and rubber elastomers used in Ford engines for four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is not necessary and not recommended to use supplemental coolant additives in your gasoline powered vehicle. These additives may harm your engine cooling system. Follow the recommended service interval for changing your engine coolant. *[SV19450( ALL)09/95] NOTE: When you change or add engine coolant, it is important to maintain your engine coolant concentration between 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60% (-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your local climate conditions. Below 40% you will lose freeze protection and above 60% your engine may overheat on a warm day. 255 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV19460( ALL)09/95] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant may void your warranty for the engine cooling system. Use only a premium nationally recognized brand name engine coolant. Do not use alcohol, methanol antifreeze or engine coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. If you do not use the proper coolant, the aluminum radiator on your vehicle will corrode. *[SV19470( ALL)09/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the Ford Rotunda engine coolant recycling process and chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycled engine coolant or an equivalent recycled engine coolant that is certified by the supplier to meet Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. % NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. *[SV19500( ALL)09/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B) or an equivalent engine coolant that meets Ford Specification ESE-M97B44-A. *[SV19550( ALL)09/95] Leave the engine coolant in all year. Make sure that the coolant will not freeze at the temperature level in which you drive during winter months. Keep a mixture of engine coolant in your engine that has a protection rating of at least -34˚F (-37˚C), or whatever protection rating is appropriate for the climate in which you live. *[SV19480( ALL)09/95] 256 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV20100( ALL)08/95] *[SV20200( ALL)11/94] Engine Coolant Drain and Flush *[SV20300( ALL)08/95] *[SV20400( ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Refill Procedure *[SV20450( ALL)05/95] NOTE: It is imperative the following procedure be adhered to. Failure to do so could result in damage to your engine. [SV20500(MBC )03/95] 3.8L engine only [SV20601(MBC )03/94] ❑ Open the vent plug. ❑ Remove coolant recovery reservoir cap. ❑ Remove radiator pressure cap. ❑ With the engine off and cool, add a 50/50 % [SV20700(MBC )03/93] [SV20801(MBC )03/93] [SV20900(MBC )05/94] Proper procedures for a complete coolant drain and flush of the cooling system can be found in the Car Service Manual. Following these recommended procedures will ensure that the specified coolant level and a 50/50 or appropriate mixture of coolant and water is maintained. When the entire cooling system is drained and refilled, the following procedure should be used to ensure a complete fill: mixture of recommended cooling system fluid and water to the radiator until full, then add to the reservoir until the reservoir is at the FULL-HOT level. [SV21000(MBC )12/91] [SV21100(MBC )03/93] ❑ Close the vent plug. ❑ Reinstall the coolant recovery reservoir cap by installing the cap to the fully installed position. [SV21110(MBC )03/93] ❑ Reinstall the pressure cap to the pressure relief position by installing the cap to the fully installed position, and then backing off to the first stop. 257 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV21200(MBC )03/93] ❑ Start and idle engine until the radiator upper hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open and coolant is flowing through the entire system). [SV21300(MBC )03/93] ❑ Immediately shut off engine. Cover cap completely with a thick cloth and cautiously remove radiator pressure cap and add a 50/50 mixture of recommended coolant and water until system is full. [SV21400(MBC )03/91] [SV21500(MBC )05/94] ❑ Reinstall the radiator cap securely. ❑ Remove the cap from the engine coolant recovery reservoir and add a 50/50 mixture of recommended cooling system fluid and water to the FULL-HOT mark on the engine coolant recovery reservoir. Check that reservoir hose is not kinked. *[SV21900(MBC )05/95] ❑ Reinstall the reservoir cap. ❑ Check for leaks at the draincock, block plug *[SV22000(MBC )03/95] ❑ Recheck the engine coolant level, using the [SV22012(M )05/95] 4.6L (2V) engine only — GT models *[SV22014( ALL)03/95] ❑ With the engine OFF and cool, remove the *[SV22021( ALL)03/95] ❑ Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and [SV21800(MBC )03/93] and vent plug. recommended procedure, after one or two occasions of vehicle use. pressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir. Remove the heater hose and clamp, located on the rear of the intake manifold. water to the coolant reservoir. Refer to Refill Capacities later in this chapter for the correct amount. Add coolant to the reservoir until the coolant continuously flows out of the tube in the rear of engine. Reattach hose and secure clamp. 258 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV22026( ALL)03/95] ❑ Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolant is at the FULL COLD level. *[SV22031( ALL)05/95] ❑ Reinstall the pressure cap to the fully *[SV22036( ALL)05/95] ❑ Start and idle the engine until the radiator *[SV22041( ALL)03/95] ❑ Immediately shut off the engine and let cool. *[SV22046( ALL)03/95] *[SV22050( ALL)03/95] *[SV22055( ALL)03/95] ❑ Reinstall the pressure cap securely. ❑ Check for leaks at the draincock. ❑ Recheck the engine coolant level, using the *[SV22090( ALL)03/95] *[SV22100( ALL)02/95] Battery % *[SV22130( ALL)06/95] installed position. upper hose is warm (this indicates the thermostat is open and coolant is flowing through the entire system). Cautiously remove the pressure relief cap and add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and water until the coolant is at the COLD FILL level in the coolant reservoir. recommended procedure, after one or two occasions of vehicle use. Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery. When the original equipment battery is replaced under warranty, it may be replaced by a Motorcraft Low-Maintenance Battery. The Low-Maintenance Battery has removable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and for adding water, if necessary. The electrolyte level should be checked at least every 24 months or 24,000 miles (40,000 km) in temperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C) and more often in temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the level indicator. Do not overfill. 259 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV22145( ALL)02/95] If the level gets low, you can add tap water to the battery, provided the water isn’t hard or doesn’t have a high mineral or alkali content. However, if possible you should refill the battery with distilled water. If the battery needs water quite often, have the charging system checked for a possible malfunction. *[SV22160( ALL)03/95] *[SV22175( ALL)04/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment % Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acid batteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility for disposal. *[SV22190( ALL)03/95] one inch art:0000983-A Battery recycling symbol % [SV22192(M )03/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. If you ever disconnect the battery, install a new battery, or experience a dead battery, you must allow the computer to “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will idle at its best. To let the engine do this, put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or Neutral (manual transmission), turn off all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Let the engine idle for at least one minute. (Engine must be warm in order to “learn.”) Also, allow approximately 10 miles (16 km) of stop and go traffic for your vehicle’s engine to completely “relearn” its idle. 260 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV22198(M )09/95] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 3.8L engine you will need to perform additional steps after the battery has been disconnected, jump started or replaced. See Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing in Servicing Your Vehicle chapter. *[SV22200( ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and Wipers % *[SV22250( ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid [SV22300( ALL)12/94] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid periodically, or when the optional lamp indicates low fluid. The reservoir for washer fluid is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. Visual inspection can determine if the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate the washer when the reservoir is empty. % [SV22900(M )10/95] half page art:0010374-D The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid 261 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV23400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not put windshield washer fluid in the container for the engine coolant. % Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather than plain water, because specially formulated washer fluids contain additives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanol should be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades, and windshield washer system. *[SV23600( ALL)03/95] *[SV23700( ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades *[SV23800( ALL)09/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will damage your blades. *[SV23900( ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply turn the ignition to the ACC position and turn your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a vertical position and turn the ignition to the OFF position. Do not move the wipers manually. *[SV23500( ALL)01/95] % Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Also check them whenever they seem less effective than usual. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades. 262 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 Manually moving the wipers across the windshield may damage them. *[SV24000( ALL)03/01] *[SV24100( ALL)09/95] Wiper blade replacement *[SV24200( ALL)03/95] *[SV24300( ALL)03/95] Tires % If the wiper blades still do not work properly after you clean them, you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly or the blade element. When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the instructions that come with them. Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them. Always follow these precautions: *[SV24500( ALL)03/95] ❑ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended *[SV24600( ALL)02/95] ❑ Stay within the recommended load limits (see *[SV24700( ALL)02/95] ❑ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly *[SV24800( ALL)10/89] *[SV24900( ALL)01/95] ❑ Drive at safe speeds. *[SV24950( ALL)07/95] *[SV25000( ALL)05/95] pressures. Load limits in the Index). distributed. If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or go flat. Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits. RWARNING Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components. 263 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV25200( ALL)05/95] % At least once a month, check the pressure in all your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can find proper cold pressure and load limits of recommended size tires on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. *[SV25400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control. *[SV25500( ALL)02/95] *[SV25600( ALL)04/95] Tire Rotation *[SV25700( ALL)01/95] For tire rotation intervals, see the Maintenance Schedule. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. % Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the following diagram. 264 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV25900(M )03/93] half page art:0010378-C Rotating the tires *[SV26500( ALL)04/95] *[SV26600( ALL)05/95] % Replacing the Tires Replace any tires that show wear bands. When your tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left. % [SV26700( ALL)05/94] one inch art:0001318-A A worn-out tire *[SV26800( ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may need to replace them before a wear band appears across the entire tread. Some spots wear more heavily than others. 265 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV26850( ALL)01/95] RWARNING When replacing full size tires, never mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the decal. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle may not drive properly and safely. *[SV27100( ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. *[SV28100( ALL)02/95] *[SV28200( ALL)01/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades *[SV28250( ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). *[SV28300( ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. % New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their Tire Quality Grade (described below) molded into the tire’s sidewall. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. 266 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV28399( ALL)01/95] *[SV28400( ALL)01/95] Treadwear *[SV28499( ALL)01/95] *[SV28500( ALL)01/95] Traction A B C *[SV28599( ALL)01/95] *[SV28600( ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C % The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A 267 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. % Snow Tires and Chains [SV28801(M )08/93] The 15 in. and 16 in. tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads that provide traction in rain or snow. However, during the winter months in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and occasionally chains for your tires. *[SV28700( ALL)04/95] *[SV28900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. [SV28910(M )05/95] For your Mustang GT models equipped with 17 in. tires, to achieve the best traction during snow and ice conditions, purchase 245/45ZR17 mud and snow tires. *[SV29000( ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the law requires them where you live. If you choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be aware of the following: *[SV29100( ALL)01/95] ❑ Make sure the chains are the right size for [SV29110(M )05/95] ❑ Use only Cable Type chains if your vehicle is your tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains. Other types may damage your vehicle. equipped with the P225/55ZR16 or 245/45ZR17 tires. Use of SAE Class “S” chains or other types may damage your vehicle. 268 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV29200( ALL)01/95] ❑ Put the chains on tightly with the ends held *[SV29300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rub *[SV29400( ALL)10/94] *[SV29500( ALL)05/94] ❑ Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible. ❑ Remove tire chains at the first opportunity *[SV29600( ALL)04/95] *[SV29700( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Wheels *[SV29800( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes are abrasive. % Automatic Transmission Fluid % *[SV30450( ALL)01/95] *[SV30475( ALL)01/95] down securely. Verify that no chain touches any wiring, brake lines, or fuel lines. Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. or bang against your vehicle, stop the vehicle and tighten the chains. If you continue to hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. after using them on snow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads. Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover to remove grease and tar. Under normal circumstances, you do not need to check the fluid level of the transmission, since your vehicle does not use up transmission fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for replacement intervals. However, if the transmission is not working properly — for instance, the transmission may slip or shift slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid leakage — the fluid level should be checked. 269 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 % Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid *[SV30560( ALL)05/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluid level at normal operating temperature 150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of driving. However, if necessary, you can check the fluid level without having to drive 20 miles (30 km) to obtain a normal operating temperature if outside temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C). [SV30575( ALL)03/94] With the vehicle on a level surface, start the engine and, while fully applying the brake pedal, move the transmission shift selector through all of the gear ranges allowing sufficient time for each position to engage. Securely latch the transmission shift selector in the P (Park) position, fully set the parking brake and leave the engine running. [SV30625(MBC )03/93] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the low cold reading on the dipstick. *[SV30650( ALL)02/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick out and wipe the indicator end clean. Put the dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read the fluid level. [SV30675(MBC )10/95] When checking fluid at normal operating temperature 150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), the fluid level should be within the hot notched area on the dipstick. When the vehicle has not been driven, and the fluid is at room temperature 50˚F-95˚F (10˚C-35˚C), the fluid level should be within the cold notched area. *[SV30550( ALL)02/95] 270 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV30715( ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds or in city traffic during hot weather, or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before checking. % Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid [SV30750( ALL)03/94] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct type will be used. Use only MERCONH fluid. *[SV30775( ALL)03/95] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through the filler tube to bring the level to the correct area on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL. If the level is above the top hole on the dipstick, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. *[SV30725( ALL)08/95] *[SV30801( ALL)09/95] % NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call your local recycling center to find out about recycling automotive fluids. [SV30825(MBC )03/93] one third page art:0011152-A Detail of the automatic transmission dipstick 271 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 % [SV30875(M )12/94] Manual Transmission Fluid % [SV30925(M )03/95] The fluid level and quality should not deteriorate under normal driving conditions. However, it is suggested that you have the fluid level checked occasionally. If fluid is required, see Lubricant Specifications in the Index. % The Clutch [SV30975(M )12/94] The clutch on your vehicle is operated by a cable that adjusts itself with a little help from you. Complete the following steps every 5,000-6,000 miles (10,000 km) to adjust the clutch. [SV31001(M )01/89] 1. Turn your engine off and put your gearshift in First. [SV31025(M )10/89] 2. Put your foot under the clutch pedal and gently pull it up until the pedal stops. [SV31050(M )01/89] 3. Then push the clutch down slowly. You will hear a click if your clutch needed adjusting and adjusted itself. *[SV31900( ALL)03/95] *[SV32000( ALL)04/95] Brake Fluid *[SV30950(M )02/95] % [SV32300(M )03/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and the brake lining wears. Check the brake fluid at each scheduled engine oil change or at least once a year. You can do this by looking at the fluid level in the plastic reservoir on the master cylinder. Also, see label on reservoir cap. (To locate the master cylinder, see The Engine Types in the Index.) The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks. 272 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV32350( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Brake fluid is toxic. *[SV32375( ALL)07/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. *[SV32400( ALL)03/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA, C6AZ-19542-BA, or equivalent DOT 3 fluid meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. *[SV33100( ALL)01/95] RWARNING If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes. *[SV33200( ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line. [SV33400(M )05/95] one third page art:0010386-C The brake fluid reservoir — 3.8L engines 273 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV33450(M )05/95] one third page art:0011349-A The brake fluid reservoir — 4.6L engines *[SV33700( ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below the seam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have the brake system inspected. *[SV33750( ALL)01/95] RWARNING Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail. *[SV34800( ALL)03/95] *[SV34900( ALL)01/95] % Power Steering Fluid Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall). % Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid [SV35055(M )10/95] 3.8L SFI engine (check warm) *[SV35100( ALL)02/95] 1. *[SV35000( ALL)03/95] 274 Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluid reaches normal operating temperature. The power steering fluid will be at the right temperature when the engine coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is near the center of the NORMAL operating temperature range. File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV35200( ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel back and forth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly is installed at this time. *[SV35300( ALL)05/95] % [SV35400(MBC )03/94] * 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which is highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). The fluid level should be between the arrows in the FULL HOT range, which is marked on the side of the dipstick, opposite the side marked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if the level is within the FULL HOT range. *[SV35500(MBC )07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level, until you reach the FULL HOT range. Do not overfill. *[SV35600(MBC )03/95] 6. When you are finished, put the dipstick back in and make sure that it fits snugly. [SV35700(MBC )12/94] half page art:0010485-C The dipstick for power steering fluid 275 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV35875(M GV)03/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford Specification MerconH ATF XT-2-QDX. *[SV35900( ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your vehicle for a long period of time before adding fluid. This can damage the power steering pump. *[SV36100(MBC )02/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it is cold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULL COLD range on the dipstick. The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperature is approximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C). [SV36105(M )10/95] NOTE: The brakes on the 4.6L engine vehicles are powered by power steering fluid from the power steering pump. The fluid level in the power steering reservoir will rise and fall due to the amount of charge in the brake booster accumulator. Therefore the following is required. [SV36157(M )10/95] 4.6L SFI engine (check cold) [SV36170(MBC )03/95] 1. Check the fluid level when the system is COLD (allow at least one half hour after driving for the power steering fluid to cool). [SV36171(MBC )10/95] 2. Locate the power steering reservoir mounted to the front upper left-hand corner of the engine. 276 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV36174(M )10/95] NOTE: Brake fluid and power steering fluid CAN NOT be mixed. Only add brake fluid to the brake master cylinder reservoir. Only add power steering fluid to the power steering reservoir. [SV36179(M )10/95] 3. Visually verify that the fluid level is above the MIN line adjacent to the reservoir “sight window.” [SV36183(M )10/95] 4. If the power steering fluid is below the MIN line, remove the cap and add fluid in small amounts until the level is between the MIN and MAX lines. [SV36186(M )10/95] 5. Reinstall the reservoir cap. [SV36188(M)02/96] It is normal for the fluid level to be above the MAX line after the brake pedal has been pushed several times with the engine off. (If you want to double check it; restart the engine and turn steering wheel to full right turn, the full left turn and then turn engine off and re-check fluid level. It should be between the MIN and MAX line.) 277 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV36195(M )10/95] half page art:0011388-A Fluid level for power steering [SV36225(M )03/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford Specification MerconH ATF XT-2-QDX. *[SV36250(MBC )03/95] NOTE: If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your vehicle for a long period of time before adding fluid. This can damage the power steering pump. % [SV36300(MBC )12/94] Fuses, High Current Fuses and Circuit Breakers *[SV36400( ALL)03/95] Fuses (conventional and high current) and circuit breakers protect your vehicle’s wiring system from overloading. If electrical parts in your vehicle are not working, the system may have been overloaded and blown a fuse or tripped a circuit breaker. Before you replace or repair any electrical parts, check the appropriate fuses (conventional and high current) or circuit breakers. 278 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV36600( ALL)03/95] The following charts tell you which fuses or circuit breakers protect the wiring for each electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows or a circuit breaker opens a circuit, all the parts of your vehicle that use that circuit will not work. *[SV36610( ALL)01/95] Once you have determined which fuses or circuit breakers to check, follow the procedures under Checking and replacing fuses or Checking and replacing circuit breakers in this chapter. [SV36700(M )03/93] half page art:0011154-A The instrument panel fuse panel location 279 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV37200(M )06/93] half page art:0011172-A The instrument panel fuse panel 280 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV37500( ALL)02/95] % The Instrument Panel Fuses, Circuit Breakers and Relays [SV37600(M )06/93] thirty-four pica chart:0010389-G 281 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV37700(M )10/95] twenty-four pica chart:0010492-G *[SV39000( ALL)01/95] *[SV39200( ALL)01/95] High Current Fuses *[SV39300(MBC )01/95] The high current fuse panel is located in the engine compartment on the left-hand fender apron. % High current fuses are circuit protectors that are part of the wiring harness for some electrical equipment. These, like fuses, open when the circuit load exceeds their amperage rating. High current fuses may be purchased from your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. 282 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV39600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. *[SV39700( ALL)07/95] Ford recommends that high current fuses be replaced by a qualified technician. [SV39800(M )08/93] one third page art:0011156-B The high current fuse panel location 283 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 % [SV40100( ALL)06/93] The high current fuse panel [SV40300(M )10/95] two third page art:0011159-C 284 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV40600( ALL)06/93] The high current fuses and relays [SV40800(M )05/95] thirty-two pica chart:0011160-B 285 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV40900(M )10/95] thirty-six pica chart:0011161-C 286 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV41210( ALL)06/95] *[SV41215( ALL)02/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses [SV41220(M )03/93] 1. Find the fuse panel cover below and to left of the steering column, in the instrument panel. Pull outward on the handle below the word “fuses” to expose the fuse panel. Squeeze the two backing tabs and pull to remove the cover. [SV41235(M )03/93] 2. On the fuse panel cover, find the number of the fuse you want to check. The following fuse panel cover tells you where to locate the fuse on the panel. *[SV41500(M )01/95] 3. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look through the clear side of the fuse to see if the metal wire inside is separated. If it is, the fuse should be replaced. % If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps: [SV41550( ALL)05/92] quarter page art:0010416-A The side view of a fuse *[SV41800(M )11/94] 4. Replace the fuse with one that has the right amperage rating. (See the following chart.) [SV41900( ALL)07/95] eight pica chart:0001092-B 287 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV41910(M GV)01/94] six pica chart:0001093-B *[SV42500( ALL)08/95] RWARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. *[SV42650(M )01/95] *[SV42800( ALL)01/95] 5. *[SV42900( ALL)03/95] *[SV43000( ALL)01/95] Circuit Breakers % [SV43200( ALL)12/94] *[SV43250( ALL)02/95] *[SV43300( ALL)08/95] Replace the cover. Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to blow if you do not find what caused the overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have your electrical system checked. If you need to check a circuit breaker that is on the fuse panel, see Checking and replacing fuses in this chapter to find out how to locate the fuse panel. Circuit breakers will reset themselves and allow the electrical parts to work again once the overload on the circuit is removed. If the circuit breakers continue to cut off electricity, have your vehicle’s electrical system checked. Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuit breakers. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with the same amperage rating. To remove a circuit breaker mounted in the fuse panel, grip it with your finger and thumb and pull it straight out of its socket. 288 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV43800(M GV)02/95] Since the circuit breaker for the headlamps is mounted in the headlamp switch, you must replace the entire switch to install a new circuit breaker. *[SV44400( ALL)03/95] *[SV44500( ALL)01/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement % *[SV44600( ALL)01/95] *[SV44700( ALL)01/95] *[SV44800( ALL)01/95] *[SV44900( ALL)01/95] *[SV44950( ALL)02/95] *[SV45000( ALL)01/95] *[SV45200( ALL)01/95] [SV45400(M )08/93] It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lights frequently: ❑ headlamps ❑ tail lamps ❑ brakelamps ❑ hazard flasher ❑ high-mount brakelamp ❑ turn signals ❑ license plate lamp ❑ fog lamps (GT and Cobra models) % The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if: *[SV45700( ALL)01/95] ❑ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to *[SV45800( ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give you *[SV45900( ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantially *[SV45600( ALL)01/95] turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beams on enough light to see clearly at night away from a position slightly down and to the right 289 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV46000( ALL)03/95] *[SV46100( ALL)01/95] % Headlamp Bulb The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable bulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replace the bulb, rather than the whole lamp. *[SV46200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. *[SV46300( ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you can immediately replace it with a new one. If a bulb is removed for an extended period of time, contaminants may enter the headlamp housing and affect its performance. [SV46450(M )03/90] quarter page art:0010536-A Parts of a headlamp *[SV46600( ALL)03/95] *[SV46700( ALL)01/95] Removing the headlamp bulb 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. [SV46705(M )05/95] 2. Open the hood and locate the headlamp access cover. Remove the plastic pushpin. 290 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV46710(M )05/95] quarter page art:0011232-B Headlamp access covers [SV46875(M )08/93] 3. Lift the cover and find the bulb in the headlamp socket. [SV47125(M )06/93] 4. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by lifting the connector clip upward while pulling the connector rearward. [SV47250(M )08/93] 5. Remove the retaining ring by turning counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn to free it from the socket. Then slide the ring off the plastic base. Keep the ring. You must use it again to hold the new bulb in place. [SV47300(M )11/92] 6. Carefully remove the bulb assembly from its socket by gently pulling it rearward without turning. 291 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV47400( ALL)03/95] *[SV47600(MBC )02/95] Installing the headlamp bulb 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into the socket. You may need to turn the bulb left or right to line up the grooves in the plastic base with the tabs in the socket. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the socket until the plastic base contacts the rear of the socket. *[SV47800(MBC )08/95] 2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the rear of the socket. Lock the ring into the socket by rotating it clockwise until you feel a “stop.” *[SV47900( ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into position. *[SV48000(MBC )02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they work properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again. [SV48075(M )05/95] 5. Reinstall the headlamp cover pushpin and tighten until snug. 292 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV51600( ALL)10/92] % Using the Right Bulbs [SV51700(M )05/95] thirty-six pica chart:0010438-G 293 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 % *[SV52400( ALL)03/95] *[SV52500( ALL)05/95] Emission Control System Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter which enables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission requirements. *[SV52550( ALL)06/95] RWARNING Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Under extreme conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the fuel system, the interior floor covering, or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. *[SV52600( ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emission control parts continue to work properly: *[SV52700( ALL)01/95] *[SV52800( ALL)01/95] *[SV52900( ALL)01/95] ❑ Use only unleaded fuel. ❑ Avoid running out of fuel. ❑ Do not turn off the ignition while your *[SV52950( ALL)01/95] *[SV53000( ALL)03/95] ❑ Do not push start your vehicle. ❑ Have the services listed in the Maintenance *[SV53075( ALL)03/95] In general, maintenance, replacement, or service of the emissions control devices or systems in your new Ford Motor Company vehicle or engine may be performed at your expense by any automotive repair establishment or individual using automotive parts equivalent to vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. Schedule and Record booklet performed according to the specified schedule. The scheduled maintenance services are required because they are considered essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. 294 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 those which your vehicle or engine was originally equipped. *[SV53150( ALL)05/95] Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts. If other than Ford or Motorcraft parts or Ford authorized remanufactured parts are used for maintenance replacements or for the service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. It is the owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please consult your warranty booklet for complete warranty information. *[SV53175( ALL)05/95] RWARNING Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. *[SV53200( ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss of oil pressure, the charge warning light, the check engine light, or the temperature warning light. These sometimes indicate that the emission system is not working properly. *[SV53300( ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine or exhaust system. *[SV53400( ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. In some of the United States and in Canada, vehicle owners 295 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV53500( ALL)02/92] *[SV53600( ALL)01/95] *[SV53700( ALL)05/95] % may be liable if their emission control device is removed or is prevented from working. Never use a metal exhaust collector when you service your vehicle. If the metal collector contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or bumper parts they could melt or deform. Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on for more than five seconds after you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires. Information about your vehicle’s emission control system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune-up specifications. % Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing *[SV53715( ALL)07/95] In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not ready for I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway driving to complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all of the OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBD II system is set to the ready condition. The amount of driving required to reach the ready condition varies with individual driving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimum amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below. If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do the additional driving required by law, a service center can perform this drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work. *[SV53702( ALL)07/95] 296 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV53717( ALL)09/95] OBD II Drive Cycle [SV53730( ALL)03/95] The following steps must be run in the order shown. If steps 2 thru 9 are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. *[SV53735( ALL)06/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. *[SV53740( ALL)07/95] The engine must be warmed up and at operating temperature before proceeding with the drive modes of the following OBD II Drive Cycle. *[SV53745( ALL)06/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral) the vehicle for 4 minutes. [SV53750(M )05/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for manual transmissions) for 40 seconds. [SV53755(M )05/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h) (for manual transmissions up shift from 1st to 5th gear, but hold in second for at least 5 seconds) at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds. *[SV53760(M )05/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at 45 mph (72 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5th gear) for 30 seconds. *[SV53765(M )08/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for manual transmissions) for 40 seconds. 297 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV53770(M )05/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at speeds between 25 and 40 mph (40-64 km/h) (manual transmissions primarily drive vehicles in 3rd and 4th gear when possible) for 15 minutes. During the 15 minute drive cycle the following modes must be achieved: *[SV53772( ALL)07/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10 seconds each *[SV53775( ALL)07/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle position, and *[SV53777( ALL)07/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5 minute steady state throttle drives. [SV53782(M )05/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions upshift to 5th gear). This should take approximately 5 minutes. *[SV53786(M )05/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at the selected speed between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5th gear) for approximately 5 minutes. *[SV53790(M )05/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying speeds between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5th gear). *[SV53794(M )05/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drive (manual transmissions use 5th gear) for 40 seconds. *[SV53796( ALL)07/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can be turned off when convenient. 298 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV53800( ALL)07/95] *[SV53900( ALL)07/95] % Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and Lubricant Specifications Refill Capacities [SV54000(M )10/95] thirty-two pica chart:0010445-M 299 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV54550( ALL)09/95] *[SV54600( ALL)10/95] % NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must be replaced every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or if the axle has been submerged in water. Otherwise, the lube should not be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. Motorcraft Parts [SV54700(M )03/95] fourteen pica chart:0010451-M [SV55000( ALL)09/94] If a spark plug is removed for examination, it must be reinstalled in the same cylinder. [SV55025(MBC )05/94] For 3.8L engines: [SV55050(MBC )03/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3 have an EG suffix. [SV55075(MBC )03/95] Cylinders #4, #5, #6 have an E suffix. [SV55100( ALL)05/95] For 4.6L (2V) engines: [SV55125( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3, #4 have a PG suffix. [SV55150( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #5, #6, #7, #8 have a P suffix. [SV55200( ALL)03/95] If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use only spark plugs with the service number suffix letter as shown on the engine decal. 300 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV55300( ALL)05/95] % Lubricant Specifications [SV55400(M )03/95] twenty-eight pica chart:0010580-I 301 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 [SV55500(M )03/95] ten pica chart:0010581-F *[SV56400( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must be replaced every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or if the axle has been submerged in water. Otherwise, the lube should not be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. *[SV57000( ALL)01/95] *[SV57100( ALL)01/95] *[SV57150( ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage % *[SV57200( ALL)01/95] *[SV57300( ALL)01/95] *[SV57400( ALL)01/95] *[SV57500( ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenance recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. General ❑ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. ❑ Protect from sunlight, if possible. ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. 302 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV57600( ALL)01/95] *[SV57700( ALL)01/95] Body *[SV57800( ALL)01/95] ❑ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed *[SV57900( ALL)01/95] ❑ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent *[SV58000( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a *[SV58100( ALL)04/95] ❑ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges *[SV58200( ALL)01/95] *[SV58300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading. ❑ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and *[SV58350( ALL)01/95] *[SV58400( ALL)01/95] Engine *[SV58500( ALL)01/95] ❑ With your foot on the brake, shift through all *[SV58600( ALL)01/95] % [SV58700( ALL)07/94] * Fuel system *[SV58900( ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days or more), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This can damage rubber and other polymers in the fuel system and may also clog small orifices. % % ❑ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders. locations. rust. thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed. and latches with a light grade oil. solvents. ❑ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature. the gears while the engine is running. ❑ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. 303 File:15rcsvm.ex Update:Thu Mar 28 14:48:54 1996 *[SV59000( ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructions on the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system. *[SV59200( ALL)01/95] *[SV59300( ALL)01/95] % [SV59400( ALL)01/95] * *[SV59500( ALL)01/95] *[SV59600( ALL)01/95] Cooling system *[SV59650( ALL)03/95] ❑ If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days [SV59675( ALL)05/94] NOTE: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset memory features. *[SV59700( ALL)01/95] *[SV59800( ALL)01/95] Brakes *[SV59900( ALL)01/95] *[SV60000( ALL)05/95] *[SV60100( ALL)01/95] *[SV60200( ALL)01/95] Tires *[SV60300( ALL)03/95] ❑ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 % % % ❑ Protect against freezing temperatures. Battery ❑ Check and recharge as necessary. ❑ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat of grease. without recharging the battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting. ❑ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released. ❑ Maintain recommended air pressure. Miscellaneous ❑ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. 304 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI00450(M )10/95] full page art:0011378-A Label Locations 305 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI00500(M )05/95] full page art:0011097-E Front Exterior View 306 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI00600(M )10/95] full page art:0011098-F Rear Exterior View (GT Shown) 307 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI00800(M )05/95] full page art:0011100-F Driver’s Door 308 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI00900(M )05/95] full page art:0011311-C Interior View 309 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI00950(M )05/95] full page art:0011362-A Instrument Panel 310 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI01000(M )05/95] full page art:0011105-E Mustang GT Instrument Cluster 311 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI01010(M )05/95] full page art:0011220-E Mustang Instrument Cluster 312 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI01100(M )10/95] full page art:0011126-G Trunk 313 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI01200(M )10/95] full page art:0011106-E 3.8L Engine Compartment 314 File:16rcqim.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 13:23:08 1996 [QI01300(M )05/95] full page art:0011348-A 4.6L (2V) Engine Compartment — GT Models Only 315 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Index A ABS warning light (see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . . 65 Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 49 Accessory power source, power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . 130 Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 249 Air bag supplemental restraint system and child safety seats . . . . . . . . 24, 30 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 25 indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 service and information labels . . . . . . 25 tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Air cleaner filter location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Air conditioning, manual heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Alarm, activating remote personal . . . . 111 Alcohol, in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Antenna, radio (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . 141, 173 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 252 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Index 317 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Anti-theft lug nuts and key. . . . . . Anti-theft system arming the system . . . . . . . . description . . . . . . . . . . . . disarming an untriggered system . . disarming a triggered system. . . . triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . warning light . . . . . . . . . . . Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) Assistance (see Customer assistance). . Audio system (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . Automatic transmission driving an automatic overdrive . . . fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . Axle lubricant specifications. . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 . . . . 105 104 106 107 107 72 218 215 . . . . 104, . . . . . . . . . 141 . . . 84 . . . . 177, . . . . . . . . . . 180 271 270 298 300 300 298 185 B Backing up . . . . . . . . . . Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . Battery acid, treating emergencies . . battery saver . . . . . . . . charging system warning light disconnecting . . . . . . . . how to service . . . . . . . jumping a disabled battery . . maintenance-free . . . . . . proper disposal, recycling . . replacement, specifications . . 318 Index . . . 179, 183 . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, . . . . . 204, . . . . . . . . . . 260 112 68 260 259 199 259 260 299 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Battery (continued) servicing . . . . . . . . . . voltage gauge . . . . . . . when storing your vehicle . . Brake fluid brake warning light . . . . . checking and adding . . . . description . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . Brakelamp, bulb replacement . . Brakes adjustment . . . . . . . . . anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light . . . . . . applying the brakes . . . . . brake warning light . . . . . fluid, checking and adding . fluid, refill capacities . . . . fluid, specifications . . . . . front disc . . . . . . . . . if brakes do not grip well . . master cylinder . . . . . . . new brake linings. . . . . . noise . . . . . . . . . . . parking . . . . . . . . . . power braking . . . . . . . servicing . . . . . . . . . . stopping distances . . . . . trailer . . . . . . . . . . . when storing your vehicle . . Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . Break-in period . . . . . . . . Brights (high beams) . . . . . Bulbs replacing. . . . . . . . . . halogen . . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 . . . . . . 76 . . . . . 303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 . 272 . 272 . 300 . 292 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 186 . . 65 . 186 . . 64 . 272 272, 298 . 300 . 186 . 186 . 272 . . 5 186–187 . 188 . 186 . 272 . 190 . 196 . 303 . 178 . . 5 . . 70 . . . . 288 289 289 292 Index 319 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 C Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 223 Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . 4 Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . 298 Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . 56 Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . 30 Cassette tape player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 141, 145, 162, 168 Catalytic converter. . . . . . . . . . . . 293 CD player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . 148, 154, 155 Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . 76 Charging system warning light . . . . . . . 68 Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 28 child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Child safety seats and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 30 automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . 14, 15, 30, 32, 39 in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 30 in front seat, convertible . . . . . . . . . 32 in front seat, coupe . . . . . . . . . . . 39 in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . 30, 39 in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Chime key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Circuit breakers checking and replacing . . . . . . . . 287 see also fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Cleaning your vehicle CD player and discs. . . . . . . . 152, 159 chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . 7 320 Index File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Cleaning your vehicle (continued) engine compartment . . . . . . . . . exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . polishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate control system air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . heating only system. . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . operation while driving . . . . . . . . recommended shift speeds. . . . . . . shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . Combination lap and shoulder belts . . . Compact disc player (see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 5–6 86 125 86 80 89 125 89 127 7 6 7 21 86 125 5–6 6 269 80 80 82 89 272 272 272 182 184 183 300 . 53 9, 11 155 129 Index 321 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Controls instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convertible cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . installation of the boot. . . . . . . . . lowering the convertible top . . . . . . raising the convertible top . . . . . . . Coolant (see Engine coolant) checking and adding . . . . . . . . . drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankcase emission filter . . . . . . . . . Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . . . Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.) . . Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of Canada . . . . . . . . . . 217, 79 125 91 138 134 132 137 252 257 303 255 298 300 73 252 236 299 97 217 223 D Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . Daytime running light system . . Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . Defrost rear window . . . . . . . . . windshield . . . . . . . . . . Dipstick automatic transmission fluid . . engine oil . . . . . . . . . . power steering fluid . . . . . . Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . Dispute Settlement Board . . . . 322 Index . . . . . 79 . . . . . 84 . . . . 222 . . . . . 83 . . . . . 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, . . . . 271 249 274 213 218 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . lubricant specifications . . . Driving under special conditions bad weather . . . . . . . . heavy load . . . . . . . . . high water . . . . . . . . . slippery roads . . . . . . . tips for safe driving . . . . . towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 300 . . . . . . 190 192 191 190 190 194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E Electrical system circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . operating when the engine is off . power point outlet . . . . . . . Electronic sound system radio reception . . . . . . . . . tuning the radio . . . . . . . . warranty and service information Electronic stereo cassette radio (see Electronic sound system) . . Emergencies, roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . battery acid spills . . . . . . . . fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency brake (parking brake) . . Emission control system catalytic converter . . . . . . . emissions warranty . . . . . . . Engine check engine warning light . . . does not start . . . . . . . . . fuel injected engine, starting . . . fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . preparing to start . . . . . . . . refill capacities . . . . . . . . . service points . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 . 278, 286 . . . . 49 . . . 130 . . . 173 . 142, 163 . . . 175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 . 215 . 199 . 245 . 199 . 213 187–188 . . . 293 . . 4, 293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 54, 57 51, 53 . . 57 51–52 . 298 . 239 Index 323 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Engine (continued) starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 53 starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 57 storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . 301–302 Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Engine coolant checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 252 checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 disposal . . . . . . . . . 236, 251, 256, 271 drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 low coolant warning light . . . . . . . . 68 preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 303 proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . 239, 252 refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Engine coolant temperature gauge description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73–74 Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Engine knocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Engine oil changing oil and oil filter . . . . . 249, 251 checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 249 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 disposal . . . . . . . . . 236, 251, 256, 271 engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 77 filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 299 low oil warning light . . . . . . . . . . 65 refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 300 synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . 248–249 “break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248–249 Entry system, remote . . . . . . . . . . 110 Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . 4 324 Index File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 F Fan engine fan, avoiding injury . . . . Federal Communications Commission . Flashers, hazard. . . . . . . . . . . Flashing the lights. . . . . . . . . . Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . Foglamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . French owner guides, how to obtain . Fuel capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . choosing the right fuel . . . . . . filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . filter, specifications . . . . . . . . fuel filler door release lever . . . . fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . running out of fuel . . . . . . . . safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . . . storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . treating emergencies . . . . . . . Fuel cap removing . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filler door remote release . . . . . . . . . . Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 174 94 92 205 139 298 86 217 218 4 223 . . 223 . . 224 . . . 3 . . . . . . . 298 . 243 . 242 . 299 . 242 . . 72 243–244 . . 243 . . 246 . . . . . . 245 302 245 . . 242 242–243 . . 242 . . 299 . . . 72 Index 325 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Fuel pump shut-off switch engine does not start . starting after a collision Fuse panels engine compartment. . high current fuse panel instrument panel . . . Fuses charts . . . . . . . . checking and replacing circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 . . . . . . . . . 57 . . . . . . . . 282 . . . . . . . . 283 . . . . . . 278, 286 . . . . . . 280, 286 . . . . . . . . 286 . . . . . . . . 287 G Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . Gasohol . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . Gauges, Mechanical engine coolant temperature gauge engine oil pressure gauge . . . . fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . speedometer . . . . . . . . . . tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) calculating . . . . . . . . . . . definition. . . . . . . . . . . . driving with a heavy load . . . . location . . . . . . . . . . . . Gearshift automatic operation . . . . . . . console-mounted . . . . . . . . downshifting . . . . . . . . . . 326 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 243 244 242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 192 192 192 . . . . . . . . . 177 179 185 . . . . . . . 73 77 72 75 75 76 75 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Gearshift (continued) floor-mounted . . . . . . locking the gearshift . . . manual operation . . . . . positions . . . . . . . . . shifting the gears . . . . . shift-lock. . . . . . . . . upshifting . . . . . . . . GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight calculating . . . . . . . . definition . . . . . . . . driving with a heavy load . location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 . . . 49 . . 182 177, 183 177, 183 . . 178 . . 184 . . 192 . . 192 . . 192 . . 192 . . 192 H Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamps aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bulb specification . . . . . . . . . checking alignment . . . . . . . . cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . daytime running lights . . . . . . flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . turning on and off . . . . . . . . Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . Heating heater only system . . . . . . . . heating and air conditioning system High beams indicator light . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 . . . . . . . . 288 . 292 . 288 . . 86 . . 84 . . 92 . . 92 288–290 . . . 85 . . 116 . . . . . . 82 80 . . . 70 . 84, 92 . . 195 Index 327 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Hood. . . . . . . . . . . latch location . . . . . . lubrication specifications . release lever . . . . . . working under the hood . Horn . . . . . . . . . . . Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 . 238 . 300 . 238 . 236 . . 95 . 254 I Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 217 Idle, relearning . . . . . . . . . 204, 236, 260 Ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 49 removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . . 61 Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . 28, 30 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Instrument panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 lighting up panel and interior . . . . . . 87 location of components . . . . . . . . . 79 Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 92–93 J Jack . . . . . . . . . . operation . . . . . . . positioning . . . . . . storage . . . . . . . . Jump-starting your vehicle attaching cables . . . . disconnecting cables . . 328 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 . 207, 209 . 207, 209 . . . 206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 204 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 K Keys key in ignition chime . . . positions of the ignition . . removing from the ignition stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51 49 50 51 L Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart . checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . daytime running light system . . . . dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . flashing the lamps . . . . . . . . . fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . illuminated mirrors . . . . . . . . . instrument panel, dimming . . . . . interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . Lights, warning and indicator air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . anti-lock brakes (ABS). . . . . . . . anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . charging system . . . . . . . . . . check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . hazard warning light . . . . . . . . high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . low coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . low oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . overdrive off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 . 288 . . 84 87–88 . . 92 . . 86 . . 94 . . 85 . . 92 . 128 . . 87 84, 87 . . 88 . 288 . 197 . . 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 65 72 64 68 70 77 94 70 68 65 77 69 Index 329 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Lights, warning and indicator (continued) safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . service engine soon . . . . . . . . . theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . turn signal indicator. . . . . . . . . Load limits GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . Lug nuts anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tightening sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 66 . . 70 . . 72 72, 91 . . . . . 192 192 194 300 131 . . . 212 209 211 M Maintenance schedule and record (see separate Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet) . Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . Manual transmission backing up (reverse). . . . . . clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . driving . . . . . . . . . . . . fluid, checking and adding . . . fluid capacities . . . . . . . . lubricant specifications. . . . . shifting gears . . . . . . . . . shift speeds. . . . . . . . . . Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . Methanol in fuel. . . . . . . . . 330 Index . . . . . 3 . . . . 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 272 182 272 298 300 183 184 131 272 244 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . rearview . . . . . . . . . side view mirrors . . . . . side view mirrors (manual) vanity mirror, illuminated . Motorcraft parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 125 125 127 128 299 N National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 222 New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 5 O Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer description . . . . . . . . . . . trip odometer . . . . . . . . . Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . 243–244 . . . . . . . . . . . 75 . . . 75 251, 299 . . 248 248–249 . . 295 . . 180 . . 224 P Panic alarm feature, remote Parking brake operation . . . . . . . warning light. . . . . . Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) PCV valve, specifications . Power distribution box (see Power door locks . . . . . Power features door locks . . . . . . . lumbar support . . . . . mirrors . . . . . . . . seats. . . . . . . . . . windows . . . . . . . . entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, . . . . 111 . 188 . . 64 . 299 . 299 . 278 . 103 103 121 127 120 114 Index 331 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Power point electrical outlet . Power steering dipstick . . . . . . . . . driving with power steering fluid, checking and adding . fluid, refill capacity . . . . fluid, specifications . . . . servicing . . . . . . . . . Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 274–275 . 186 . 274 . 298 . 300 . 186 . 238 R Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 141 Rear axle lubricant specification . . . . . . . . . 300 refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . 298 Regulations, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Remote control, trunk . . . . . . . . . . 132 Remote entry system arming and disarming the anti-theft system111 illuminated entry . . . . . . . . . . . 112 locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . . 110 opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . 110 panic alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 replacement/additional transmitters. . . 113 replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . 112 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . 222 Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints) adult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 30 332 Index File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 199 264 S Safe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . Safety chains, when towing a trailer . Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . Safety information relating to automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . Safety restraints adjusting the safety belts . . . . automatic locking mode . . . . . . automatic locking mode (retractor) . cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . extension assembly . . . . . . . . for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . for children . . . . . . . . . . . for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . for pregnant women . . . . . . . head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . replacement . . . . . . . . . . . warning light and chime . . . . . Safety seats for children and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . attaching with tether straps . . . . automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . . . 14–15, in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . in front seat, convertible. . . . . . in front seat, coupe . . . . . . . . in rear outboard . . . . . . . . in rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . tether anchorage hardware . . . . Seat belts (see Safety restraints). . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 . . 9 . 196 . 222 . . 245 11, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 15 14–15 14–15 . 21 . 20 . 9 . 28 28, 30 . 9 116 9, 11 . 21 . 9 . 21 . 66 24, 30–31 . . . 30 30, . . . . . . 30, . . . . . . . . 32, 39 . 30 . 32 . 39 32, 39 . 30 . 30 . 9 116 Index 333 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Seats (continued) adjusting the seat, manual . . . . adjusting the seats, power . . . . child safety seats . . . . . . . . cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . folding rear seats . . . . . . . . head restraints . . . . . . . . . rear seat access . . . . . . . . . reclining the seat . . . . . . . . Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . Servicing your vehicle precautions when servicing . . . servicing when you tow . . . . . Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . Shift positions (see Gearshift) . . . . Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints). Side mirrors adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . Spare tire changing the tire . . . . . . . . conventional spare . . . . . . . finding the spare . . . . . . . . removing the spare tire . . . . . storing the flat tire . . . . . . . temporary spare . . . . . . . . Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . Special driving conditions . . . . . Specification chart, lubricants . . . . Speed control accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . canceling a set speed . . . . . . resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . resuming a set speed . . . . . . tap up/tap down . . . . . . . . turning off . . . . . . . . . . . when towing a trailer . . . . . . 334 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 . 120 . . 30 . 125 . 124 . 116 . 122 . 119 . 217 . 216 . . . . . . . . . . 177, 236 213 178 183 . . 9, 11 . . . . 11 . . . . . . 127 268 . . . . . . . . . 205, 207 . . 206 . . 206 206–207 206, 209 . . 205 . . 299 . . 190 . . 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 . 101 . 100 . 101 100–101 . . 101 197–198 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . Starting your vehicle preparing to start your vehicle . . starting a cold engine . . . . . . starting after a collision . . . . . starting a warm engine . . . . . starting your vehicle if the battery is disabled . . . . . . . . . . Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . locking . . . . . . . . . . . . speed controls . . . . . . . . . tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage compartments center console . . . . . . . . . map pockets . . . . . . . . . . Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental air bag readiness light Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . 75 . . . . 52 53 57 53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 49 97 96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 131 301 128 67 22 T Tachometer mechanical cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Tail lamps bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 288, 292 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 80 Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 30 Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Tires changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 checking the pressure . . . . . . . 263–264 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 263 replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Index 335 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Tires (continued) snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 268 spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 303 tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . 265–266 treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 267 wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 194 Towing your vehicle using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . 213 with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . . . . . . 185 Trailer towing calculating maximum trailer weight. . . . . . . . . . 194–195 safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Transmission automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 177 fluid, checking and adding (automatic) . 270 fluid, checking and adding (manual) . . 272 fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 298 lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 300 manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Transmission control switch . . . . . . . 180 Transmitter (see Remote entry) . . . . . . 110 Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Trunk remote release lever . . . . . . . . . . 132 using the keys to open . . . . . . . . 131 using the remote entry system to open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 336 Index File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Tune-up specifications (VECI) Turn signal . . . . . . . . . indicator lights . . . . . . lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 . . . 91 . 72, 91 . . . 91 U Upshift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Used engine oil, disposal . . 236, 251, 256, 271 V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . 92–93 VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 217 Vehicle loading automatic transmissions . . . . . . . . 192 calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 192 manual transmissions . . . . . . . . . 192 understanding loading information . . . 192 Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Ventilating your vehicle (see Climate control) . . . . . . . 80–81, 83 Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . 248–249 Visor (see Sun visor) . . . . . . . . . . 128 Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) . . . . 68 W Warm engine, starting . . . Warning chimes key in ignition . . . . . safety belt . . . . . . . Warning lights (see Lights). Warranties basic. . . . . . . . . . Canada . . . . . . . . radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 66 61 . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . 175 Index 337 File:rcixm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:41:15 1996 Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 4 Washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 192 Wheel bearings, lubricant specifications . . 300 Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . . . . 213 Wheels anti-theft lugnuts . . . . . . . . . . . 212 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 209, 211 inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 263 lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ornaments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Windows manual windows, operating . . . . . . 114 one-touch down. . . . . . . . . . 114–115 power windows, operating . . . . . . . 114 rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Windshield, washing. . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Windshield washer fluid and wipers checking and adding fluid . . . . . . . 261 checking and replacing wiper blades . . 262 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 300 variable interval wipers . . . . . . . 92–93 Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . 92 Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 338 Index File:17rcgsm.ex Update:Wed Mar 27 09:39:33 1996 Service Station Information [GS00150(M )10/95] twenty-six pica chart:0011195-H 340